0% found this document useful (0 votes)

15 views

12th Physics Question Bank Em

Uploaded by

catherinemary8282

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

15 views

12th Physics Question Bank Em

Uploaded by

catherinemary8282

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 125

www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.

com

+2 PHYSICS
1 MJK

+2 PHYSICS

Q – BANK

www.Padasalai.Net
NAME : …………………………..
CLASS : ………………………….

 Book back-1 marks& public 1 marks March -2017

updated
 3 mark questions with page numbers
 5 mark questions
 10 mark questions
 Creative ,Topic wise one marks
 Full portion one marks for Board Examination
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
2 MJK

ONE MARKS BOOK BACK & PUBLIC QUESTIONS(M 2006 – M 2017)

1. ELECTROSTATICS
BOOK BACK
1. A glass rod rubbed with silk acquires a charge of +8 x 10-12 C, the number of electrons it has
gained or lost
a) 5 x 10-7 (gained) b) 5 x 107 (lost) c) 2 x 10-8 (lost) d) -8 x 10-12 (lost)
2. The electrostatic force between two point charges kept at a distance d apart, in a medium r = 6,
is 0.3 N. The force between them at the same separation in vacuum is
a) 20 N b) 0.5 N c) 1.8 N d) 2 N
-1
3. Electric field intensity is 400 Vm at a distance of 2m from a point of charge. It will be
100 Vm-1 at a distance? (Mar 07, June 12,Oct 12)
a) 50 cm b) 4 cm c) 4 m d) 1.5m
4. Two point charges +4q and +q are placed 30cm apart. At what point on the line joining them the
electric field is zero?
a) 15 cm from the charge q b) 7.5 cm from the charge q
c) 20cm from the charge 4q d) 5 cm from the charge q
5. A dipole is placed in a uniform electric field with its axis parallel to the field. It experiences.
(Mar 06, 07, Oct 07, 08,J-13)

www.Padasalai.Net
6.
a) only a net force
c) both a net force and torque
b) only a torque
d) neither a net force nor a torque.
If a point lies at a distance x from the midpoint of the dipole, the electric potential at this point
is proportional to
1 1 1 1
(Mar 11, 14)
a) 2 b) 3 c) 4 d) 3 / 2
x x x x
7. Four charges +q, +q, -q and –q respectively are placed at the corners A, B, C and D of a square
of side a. The electric potential at the centre O of the square is (Oct 06)
1 q 1 2q 1 4q
a) b) c) d) zero
4 0 a 4 0 a 4 0 a
8. Electrical potential energy (U) of two point charges is (Mar 09, June 10, 11,O-13)
q1q 2 qq
a) b) 1 2 c) pE cos  d) pE sin 
4 0 r 2
4 0 r
9. The workdone in moving 500C charge between two point on equipotential surface is
(J- 07, 10 March 08, 10, 12, Oct 11,J-14)
a) zero b) finite c) finite negative d) infinite
10. Which of the following quantities is scalar? (June 06, 08, Mar 09, Oct 10, 11)
a) dipole moment b) electric force c) electric field d) electric potential
11. The unit of permittivity is (Mar 08, Oct 08, June 11,Oct 12,O-13)
a) C2 N-1 m-2 b) Nm2 C-2 c) H m-1 d) N C-2m-2
12. The number of electric lines of force originating from a charge of 1C is
a) 1.129 x 1011 b) 1.6 x 10-19 c) 6.25 x 1018 d) 8.85 x 1012
13. The electric field outside the plates of two oppositely charged plane sheets of charge density  is
(M- 08, 11, O- 09, J- 11,M- 13,14,O-14)
  
a) b) c) d) zero
2 0 2 0 0
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
3 MJK

14. The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor increases form 5F to 60F when a dielectric is
filled between the plates. The dielectric constant of the dielectric is (J- 08, O-10,J-14,O-14)
a) 65 b) 55 c) 12 d) 10
15. A hollow metal ball carrying an electric charge produces no electric field at points
(M- 10,12,J-13,O-13)
a) outside the sphere b) on its surface c) inside the sphere d) at a distance more than twice

ANSWERS
1.(b) 2.(c) 3.(c) 4.(c) 5.(d) 6.(a) 7.(d) 8.(b) 9.(a) 10(d) 11(a) 12(a) 13(d) 14(c) 15(c)

1. The unit of electric flux is (Mar 06, June 09)

a) N m2 C-1 b) N m-2 C-1 c) N m2 C d) N m-2 C
2. The work done in moving 4C charge from one point to another in an electric field is 0.012 J.
The potential difference between them is (Mar 06)
3
a) 3000V b) 6000 V c) 30V d) 48 x 10 V
3. Torque on a dipole in a uniform electric field is maximum, when angle between P and E is
(June 06, Oct 09)

www.Padasalai.Net
a) 0 b) 90 c) 45 d) 180
4. Potential energy of two equal negative point charges of magnitude 2C placed 1m apart in air is
(June 06)
a) 2 J b) 0.36 J c) 4 J d) 0.036 J
5. A hollow metallic spherical shell carrying an electric charge produces no electric field at points
(June 06, Mar 12)
a) on the surface of the shell b) inside the shell
c) at infinite distance from the centre of the shell d) outside the shell
6. The value of permittivity of free space is (Oct 06)
12 2 -1 -2 8 2 -1 -2
a) 8.854 x 10 C N m b) 9 x 10 C N m
1 1
c) C 2 N 1 m 2 d) C 2 N 1 m 2
9  10 9
4  9  10 9

7. The unit of electric field intensity is (Oct 06, June 08, Mar 09,O-14)
a) NC-2 b) NC c) Vm-1 d) Vm
8. The principle used in lightning conductors (Oct 06)
a) corona discharge b) mutual induction
c) self-induction d) electromagnetic induction
9. The unit of electric dipole moment is (Mar 07)
a) volt / metre (V / m) b) coulomb / metre (C / m)
c) volt metre (V m) d) coulomb metre (C m)
10. Electric potential energy of a electric dipole in an electric field is given as (Mar 07)
a) pE sin  b) – pE sin c) – pE cos d) pE cos
11. Which of the following is not a dielectric? (June 07)
a) Ebonite b) Mica c) Oil d) Gold
12. The direction of electric field at a point on the equatorial line due to an electric dipole is
a) along the equatorial line towards the dipole (June 07)
b) along the equatorial line away from the dipole
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
4 MJK

c) parallel to the axis of the dipole and opposite to the direction of dipole moment
d) parallel to the axis of the dipole and in the direction of dipole moment

13. In the given circuit, the effective capacitance between A and B will be (June 07)
3F 6F

A B

2F 2F

a) 3 F b) 36 / 13 F c) 13F d) 7F
14. The number of electric lines of force originating from a charge of 1micro coulomb is (Oct 07)
a) 1.129x105 b) 220V c) 50V d) 70.7
15. The equivalent capacitance of two capacitors in series is 1.5F. The capacitance of one of them
is 4F. The value of capacitance of the other is (Oct 07)
a) 2.4F b) 0.24F c) 0.417F d) 4.17F
16. The law that governs the force between electric charges is (Oct 07)
a) Ampere’s law b) Faraday’s law c) Coulomb’s law d) Ohm’s law
17. An electric dipole placed at an angle θ in a non-uniform electric field experiences
a) neither a force nor a torque b) torque only (Mar 08, Oct 08)
c) Both force and torque d) net force only
18. A capacitor of capacitance 6 µF is connected to a 100 V battery. The energy stored in the

www.Padasalai.Net
19.
capacitor is
a) 30 J b) 3 J c) 0.03 J d) 0.06 J
When an electric dipole of dipole moment P is aligned parallel to the electric field E
then the potential energy of the dipole is given is
(Mar 08)

(June 08)
a) PE b) Zero c) – PE d) pE / 2
20. Quantisation of electric charge is given by (Oct 08)
a) q = ne b) q = cV c) q = e/n d) q = e/V
21. An example of conductor is (Oct 08)
a) glass b) human body c) dry wood d) ebonite
22. The magnitude of the force acting on a charge of 2 x 10-10 C placed in a uniform electric
field of 10 Vm-1 is (Mar 09)
a) 2 x 10-9 N b) 4 x 10-9 N c) 2 x 10-10 N d) 4 x 10-10 N
23. The torque (  ) experienced by an electric dipole placed in a uniform electric field (E)
at an angle with the field is (Jun 09)
a) PE cos  b) - PE cos  c) PE sin  d) 2PE sin 
24. The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor increases from 5 µF to 50 µF when a dielectric
is filled between the plates. The permittivity of dielectric is (June 09)
-12 2 -1 2 -11 2 -1 2
a) 8.854 x 10 C N m b) 8.854x10 C N m c) 12 d) 10
25. The negative gradient of potential is (June 09)
a) electric force b)torque c) electric current d) electric field intensity
26. When a point charge of 6C is moved between two points in an electric field, the work done
is 1.8 x 10-5J. The potential difference between the two points is (Oct 09)
a) 1.08 V b) 1.08 V c) 3 V d) 30 V
27. The equivalent capacitance of two capacitors connected in series is 1.5 µF. The capacitance
of one of them is 4 µF. The capacitance of the other is (Oct 09)
a) 2.4 µF b) 2 µF c) 4 d) 6
28. Three capacitors of capacitances 1F, 2 F and 3 F are connected in series. The
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
5 MJK

effective capacitance of the capacitors is (Mar 10)

11 6 1
a) 6 F b) F c) F d) F
6 11 6
29. An electric dipole of moment 𝑃 is placed in a uniform electric field of intensity ⃗ at an angle 
⃗
with respect to the field. The direction of the torque is (Mar 10)
a) along the direction of 𝑃⃗ b) opposite to the direction of 𝑃⃗
c) along the direction of ⃗ d) perpendicular to the plane containing 𝑃⃗ and ⃗
30. The electric field intensity at a distance r due to infinitely long straight charge wire is directly
proportional to (June 10,Oct 12)
1 1
a) r b) c) r2 d) 2
r r
31. The ratio of electric potential at points 10 cm and 20 cm from the centre of an electric dipole
along its axial line is (June 10)
a) 1 : 2 b) 2 : 1 c) 1 : 4 d) 4 : 1
32. The intensity of electric field at a point is equal to (Oct 10)
a) the force experienced by a charge q
b) the work done in bringing unit positive charge from infinity to that point
c) the positive gradient of the potential
d) the negative gradient of the potential
33. The capacitance of a capacitor is (Oct 10)
a) directly proportional to the charge q given to it
b) inversely proportional to its potential V
c) directly proportional to the charge q and inversely proportional to the potential V

www.Padasalai.Net
34.

35.
d) independent of both the charge q and potential V
The intensity of the electric field that produces a force of 10-5 N on a charge of 5C is (Mar 11)
a) 5 x 10-11 NC-1 b) 50 NC-1 c) 2NC-1 d) 0.5 NC-1
The unit of the number of electric lines of force passing through a given area is
-1 2 -1
(Mar 11)
a) no unit b) NC c) Nm C d) Nm
36. A dielectric medium is placed in an electric field E0. The field induced inside the medium (J-11)
a) acts in the direction of the electric field b) acts opposite to E0
c) acts perpendicular to E0 d) is zero
37. n capacitors each of capacitance C are connected in series. The effective capacitance is (O-11)
n C
a) b) c) nC d) C
C n
38. A non-polar dielectric is placed in an electric field (E). Its induced dipole moment (Oct 11)
a) is zero b) acts in the direction of E
c) acts opposite to the direction of E d) acts perpendicular to E
39. The value of relative permittivity of air is (Mar 12)
-12 2 -1 2 9 2 -1 -2
a) 8.854 x 10 c N m b) 9 x 10 c N m
c) 1 d) 8.854 x 1012
40. When the charge given to a capacitor is doubled its capacitance is (M- 12,O-15)
a) increases twice b) decreases twice
c) increases four times d) does not change
41. The work done in moving 50C change between two points on equipotential surface is (J- 12)
a) zero b) finite positive c) finite negative d) infinite
42. The electric field intensity at a short distance r from uniformly charged infinite plane sheet of
charge is (June 12)
1 1
a) proportional to r b) proportional to c) proportional to 2 d) independent of r
r r
43. The unit of relative permittivity is (June 12)
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
6 MJK

a) C2N-1m-2 b) Nm2C-2 c) No unit d) NC-2m-2

44. An electric dipole of dipole moment ‘p’ is kept parallel to an electric field of intensity ‘E’ .The
workdone in rotating the dipole through an angle of 90° is : (Mar 13)
a)Zero b)-pE c)pE d)2pE
45. Two point charges +q and –q are placed at points A and B respectively separated by a small
distance.The electric field intensity at the midpoint O of AB (Mar 13)
a) is zero b) acts along AB c) acts along BA d) acts perpendicular to AB
46. Which of the following quantities is scalar? (Mar 13)
a)dipole moment b)electric force c)electric field d)electric potential
47. The total flux over a closed surface enclosing a charge q (in Nm2c-1) (J-13)
9 9 -12
a)8 q b)9 x 10 c)36 x 10 q d)8.854 x 10 q
48. The electric field inside the plates of two oppositely charged plane sheets of charge density 𝜎
is
  
a) b) c) d) zero (J-13)
2 0 2 0 0
49. The repulsive force between two like charges of 1 coulomb each separated by a distanceof 1 m
in vacuum is equal to : (O-13)
(a) 9x109 N (b) 109 N (c) 9x10-9 N (d) 9 N
50. What must be the distance between two equal and opposite point charges (say +q and –q ) for
the electrostatic force between them to have a magnitude of 16 N ? (Mar -14)
a) 4√ metre b) √ metre c) 4 kq metre d)
51. A non-polar molecule is placed in an external electric field ⃗ .The induced dipole moment acts

www.Padasalai.Net
52.
a) in the direction of ⃗
c) perpendicular to the direction of
The principle of vande graf generator
⃗
b) opposite to the direction of ⃗
d) random
(J-14)

(J-14)
a) electromagnetic induction and action of points b) electrostatic induction and action of points
c) electrostatic induction only d) action of points only
53. For which of the following medium, the value of relative Permitivity =1 (O-14)
a) Mica b) Air c) Glass d) Water
54. The unit of molecular polarisability is (M-15)
a) C2N-1m c)Nm2C-1 c) N-1m-2C2 d) C-1 m2 V
55. Point charge +q ,+ q ,-q and ,-q are placed at the corners A,B,C and D respectively of a square .
O is the pont of intersection of the diagonals AC and BD .The resultant electric field intensity at
the point O (M-15)
a) acts in a direction parallel to AB b) acts in a direction parallel to BC
c) acts in a direction parallel to CD d) is zero
56. Two point charges +q1 and +q2 are placed in air at a distance of 2m apart.One of the charges is
moved towards the other through a distance of 1m .The workdone is (J-15)
a) b) c) d)

57. Two capacitances 0.5µF and 0.75µF are connected in parallel.Calculate the effective
capacitance of the capacitor (O-15)
a) 0.80 µF b) 0.70 µF c) 0.25 µF d) 1.25 µF
58. The equipotential surface of an electric dipole is (M-16)
a) a sphere whose centre coincides with the centre of the electric dipole
b) a plane surface inclined at an angle of 45º with the axis of the electric dipole
c) a plane surface passing through the centre of the electric dipole and perpendicular to the axis
of the electric dipole

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
7 MJK

d) any plane surface parallel to the axis of the electric dipole

59. A and B are two hollow metal spheres of radii 50cm and 1m carrying charges 0.6µC and 1µC
respectively.They are connected externally by a conducting wire.Now the charges flows from
a) A to B till the charges become equal b) A to B till the potentials become equal
c) Bto A till the charges become equal d) B to A till the potentials become equal(M-16)
60. When a dielectric slab is introduced between the plates of a charged parallel plate capacitor,its
a) potential increases b) electric field decreases
c) charge increases d) capacitance decreases (M-16)

61. The force between two charges situated in a medium of permittivity ‘ ′ is (J-16)
x
a) b) 9 x 109 c) 9 x 109 d)
62. The work done in moving 6 µC charge between two points is 1.2x10-5 J. Find the
potential difference between two points : (O -16)
a) 6V b) 2V c) 12 V d) 72 V
63. Point charges q1 and q2 are placed in air at a distance ‘r’.The ratio of the force on charge q1 by
charge q2 and force on charge q2 by charge q1 is : (M-17)
a) b) c) 1 d) [ ]

64. The electric field at a point 2cm from an infinite line charge of linear charge density 10-7 Cm-1 is
a) 4.5 x 104 NC-1 b) 9 x 104 NC-1 c) 9 x 102 NC-1 d) 18 x 104 NC-1 (M-17)

ANSWERS

www.Padasalai.Net
1.(a)
13.(a)
25.(d)
2.(a)
14.(a)
26.(c)
3.(b)
15.(a)
27.(a)
4.(d)
16.(c)
28.(c)
5.(b)
17.(c)
29.(d)
6.(d)
18.(c)
30.(b)
7.(c)
19.(c)
31.(d)
8.(a)
20.(a)
32.(d)
9.(d)
21.(b)
33.(d)
10.(c)
22.(a)
34.(c)
11.(d)
23.(c)
35.(c)
12.(c)
24.(b)
36.(b)
37.(b) 38.(b) 39.(c) 40.(d) 41.(a) 42.(d) 43.(c) 44.(c) 45.(b)4 46.(d) 47.(c) 48.(c)
49.(a) 50.(b) 51.(a) 52.(b) 53.(b) 54.(a) 55.(b) 56.(c) 57.(d) 58.(c) 59.(b) 60.(b)
61.(d) 62.(b) 63.(c) 64.(b)

3 MARKS
1. Define ‘Coulomb’ on the basis of coulomb’s law. pg no.4 (M-06,J-07,S-10,J-10,S-11,M-13)
2. Why is it safer to be inside a car than standing under a tree during lightning
pg no.21(M-07,S-08,09,J-14,15,M-17)
3. What is meant by electric polarization OR dielectric polarisastion? 25 (S-06,S-09,S-11,J-14)
4. Define electric potential at a point pg 12 (M-07,J-13,O-13)
5. What is a polar molecule? Give any two examples pg no.24 (M-07, J -11,M-13,J-16)
6. What is corona discharge? What are its advantages? Or Action of points pg 30(J-7,O-8,14,15)
7. Write the applications of capacitor. pg no.27 (O-07,M-11,M-12,O-16)
-7
8. Calculate the potential at a point due to a charge of 4 x 10 C located at 0.09m away from it.
(M-12,14)
9. Three capacitors each of capacitance 9 pF are connected in series. What is the total
capacitance of the combination? pg no.48 (M-08,J-16)
10. State Gauss’ law in electrostatics. pg .17,18 (J-6, O-6,M -09,M-11,-15M-16)
11. Define electric flux. Give its unit. pg no.17 (M-08)
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
8 MJK

12. Explain the working of a microwave oven.Or principle of microwave oven pg 12 (Jun 8,14)
13. What is electrostatic shielding? pg no.21 (M-08)
14. What is a capacitor? Define its capacitance. pg no.22 (M-09)
15. Mention any three properties of electric lines of force. pg no.7 (J-10,M-16)
16. What are non polar molecules? Give examples. pg 24 (O-10,13)
17. State Coulomb’s law in electrostatics pg no.3 (J-07,M-15)
18. Calculate the effective capacitance of the combination shown in figure ( O-08,J-13)

19. What is an electric dipole.Define electric dipole moment.Give its unit. Pg no 8 (M-14,17)

20. A sample of HCl gas is placed in an electric field of 2.5 x 104 N C-1. The dipole moment of each
HCl molecule is 3.4 x 10-30 C m. Find the maximum torque that can act on a molecule. (M-15)
21. A point charge causes an electric flux of –6 x 103 Nm2 C-1 to pass through a spherical Gaussian
surface of 10 cm radius centred on the charge. (i) If the radius of the Gaussian surface is
doubled, how much flux will pass through the surface? (ii) What is the value of charge? (O-15)
22. An infinite line charge produces a field of 9 x 104 NC-1 at a distance of 2 cm. Calculate the
linear charge density. (O-16)

Prove that the energy stored in a parallel plate capacitor is (J-12,O-15)

14. Deduce an expression for the effective capacitance of capacitors of capacitances C1,C2and C3
connected in series. (M-14)
15. What is a capacitor ? Explain the principle of capacitor (J-14)
16. Three charges + 1 C + 3 C and -5C are kept at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of sides
60 cm. Find the electrostatic potential energy of the system of charges. (M-16)

10 MARKS
1. What is an electric dipole? Derive an expression for the electric field due to an electric
dipole at a point on its axial line. (M - 06, J - 06, M - 09, J - 10, O -10, M – 11,J-14,M-16)
2. Derive an expression for electric potential due at a point to an electric dipole.
Discus the special cases. (O - 06, M - 08, J - 08, M - 10, O – 11,M-13,15)
3. Deduce an expression for equivalent capacitance of capacitors connected (i) parallel (ii)series.
(J - 07, O - 07)
4. Principle, construction and working of Van de Graaff generator. What is its use?
(O - 08, O - 09, O – 12,M-14,O-15,M-17)
5. What is an electric dipole? Derive an expression for electric field due to an electric dipole at a
point along the equatorial line. (M - 07, J – 09, O-13,J-15)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
10 MJK

6. State Gauss’s law. Applying this calculate electric field due to (i) an infinitely long
straight charged with uniform charge density. (J - 11, M – 12,J-13)
7. Explain the principle of a capacitor. Deduce an expression for the capacitance of a parallel
plate capacitor. ( J -12,O-14)
8. What is dielectric? Explain the effect of introducing a dielectric slab between the plates
of a parallel plate capacitor.Write its applications (J-16)
9. Using Gauss’ law Explain electric field due to uniformly charged spherical shell

2. CURRENT ELECTRICITY

1. A charge of 60C passes through an electric lamp in 2 minutes. Then the current in the lamp is
a) 30 A b) 1 A c) 0.5 A d) 5 A
2. The material through which electric charge can flow easily is (Oct 07,14)
a) quartz b) mica c) germanium d) copper
3. The current flowing in a conductor is proportional to
a) drift velocity b) 1 / area of cross section
c) 1 / no. of electrons d) square of area of cross section
4. A toaster operating at 240V has a resistance of 120. The power is (June 10)
a) 400 W b) 2 W c) 480 W d) 240 W
5. If the length of a copper wire has a certain resistance R then on doubling the length its specific
resistance (Oct 06, 09, 11 June 08, Mar 10, 11)
a) will be doubled b) will become ¼th

www.Padasalai.Net
6.

7.
c) will become 4 times

a) decreases b) increases
c) 1
d) will remain the same
When two 2 resistances are in parallel, the effective resistance is
a) 2 b) 4
In the case of insulators, as the temperature decreases, resistivity
d) 0.5
(Oct 08, June 11)

(Mar 08, 09,J-13,14)

c) remains constant d) becomes zero
8. If the resistance of a coil is 2 at 0C and  = 0.004 / C, then its resistance at 100 C is
a) 1.4 b) 0 c) 4 d) 2.8
9. According to Faraday’s law of electrolysis, when a current is passed, the mass of ions deposited
at the cathode is independent of
a) current b) charge c) time d) resistance
10. When n resistance of equal resistances (R) are connected in series, the effective resistance is (O- 12)
a) n / R b) R / n c) 1 / nR d) nR

ANSWERS

1.c) 2.(d) 3.(a) 4.(c) 5.(d) 6.(c) 7.(b) 8.(d) 9.(d) 10.(d)

1. Resistance of a metal wire of length 10 cm is 2 . If the wire is stretched uniformly to 50cm,

the resistance is (Mar 06)
a) 25  b) 10 c) 5 d) 50
2. The colour code on a carbon resistor is red-red-black. The resistance of the resistor is (June 06)
a) 2.2 b) 22 c) 220 d) 2.2k
3. The brown ring at one end of a carbon resistor indicates a tolerance of (Mar 07)
a) 1% b) 2% c) 5% d) 10%
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
11 MJK

4. The unit of conductivity is (June 07)

-1
a) mho b) ohm c) ohm-m d) mho-m
5. The Transition temperature of mercury is (June 09)

a) 4.20C b) 4.2 K c) 2.40C d) 2.4 K

6. The relation between current and drift velocity is (Oct 09)
nAV d nAV d
a) I = b) I = nAVde c) I = d) I = nAVdE
e A
7. When the diameters of a conductor is doubled, its resistance, (Mar 12)
a) decreases twice b) decreases four times
c) decreases sixteen times d) increases four times
8. A cell of emf 2.2 V sends a current of 0.2 A through a resistance of 10 , internal resistance of
the cell is (June 12)
a) 0.1  b) 1  c) 2  d) 1.33 
9. The electrical resistivity of a thin copper wire and a thick copper rod are respectively Ω m
and Ωm.Then (Mar 13)
a) > b) > c) = d)
10. The unit of electrochemical equivalent is : (O-13)
a) kg. coulomb b) kg/ ampere c)kg/ampere sec d) coulomb / kg.
11. When ‘n’ resistors of equal resistance (R ) are connected in series and in parallel
respectively,then the ratio of their effective resistance is : (Mar 14)
2 2
a) 1:n b) n :1 c) n:1 d)1:n
12. A graph is drawn taking potential difference across the ends of a conductor along x-axis and

www.Padasalai.Net
13.
current through the conductor along the Y-axis .The slope of the straight line gives (M-15)
a) resistance b) conductance

1Wh (Watt hour ) is equal to

c) resistivity d) conductivity

(M-16)
a) 36 x 105 J b) 36 x 104 J c) 3600 J d) 3600Js-1
14. The effective resistance between A and B in the given network (O-16)
2Ω 3Ω

A B

5Ω

a) 2.5 Ω b)10Ω c) 0.4 Ω d) 11 Ω

15. The colour code on a carbon resistor is Brown,Blackand red . The value of the resistor is (M-17)
a) 10 ± 5% b) 1k ± 2% c) 100± 2% d) 10± 2%

ANSWERS

1.(d) 2.b) 3.(a) 4.(d) 5.(b) 6.(b) 7.(b) 8.(b) 9.(c) 10.(c) 11.(b)
12.(b) 13.(c) 14.(a) 15.(c)

3 MARKS

1. Define Mobility. Write its unit. pg no.47 (O-06,M-08,09,O-15,M-16)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
12 MJK

2. State Kirchhoff’s (i) current law, (ii) voltage law. pg no.55,56 (J-6,M-7,8,9,J-11,M-12,14,O-15)
3. Write any three application of superconductors. pg no.51 (J-06,O-06,J-07,O-07,J-13,M-15)
4. A manganin wire of length 2m has a dimeter of 0.4mm with a resistance of 70 . Find the
reisistivity of a material. pg no76. (J-06)
5. What are the changes observed at transition temperature when the conductor becomes a
superconductor? pg no.51 (J-11,M-14)
6. Define transition temperature pg no.51(M-12,J-16)
7. What is electrical resistivity or Define resistivity of a material. pg no.49 (O-12,M-15)
8. What are the applications of secondary cells? pg no.68 (O-08,11,M-12)
9. Two wires of same material and length have resistances. 5 and 10 respectively. Find the
ratio of radii of the two wires. pg no.70 (M-09)
10. Distinguish between electromotive force and potential difference
pg no 62.(M-J-07,O-08,J-11,12,M-13,15)
11. The resistance of a Nichrome wire at 0C is 10. If its temperature co-efficient of
resistance is 0.004/C, find its resistance at boiling point of water. Comment on the result.
pg no 77 (J-07,O-08,M-08,J-09,O-10,O-11,O-12,13,J-15)
12. The resistance of platinum wire at 0C is 4. What will be the resistance of the wire at 100C
if the temperatures coefficient of resistance of platinum is 0.0038/C?pg77 (M-07,J-10,16,O-16)
13. From the following network, find the effective resistance between A and B
R1 = 15 pg no73 (J-12)

www.Padasalai.Net
A B

R2 =15
14. State Faraday’s laws of electrolysis. pg no.63 (M-06,J-10,O-10,J-13,15,M-17)
15. Define drift velocity pg 47 (M-07,O-08,J-09,O-09,M-10,O-10,M-11,O-11,J-13,15)
16. Distinguish between electric power and electric energy pg no.62 (J-08,09,O-13,J-14,O-14)
17. If 6.25 x 1018 electrons flow through a given cross- section of a conductor in unit time,
find the current. [ Given: Charge of an electron is 1.6 x 10 -19 C] pg no69 (M-10,J-11)

18. In the following circuit, calculate the current through the circuit. Mention its direction. (O-14)

A B

5 10V 10

D C
20V 5 

19. Define temperature coefficient of resistance. pg no.54 (J-08,M-11, J-14,M-16)

20. State Ohm’s law. pg no.48 (M-06,O-07,09,M-10,J12,M-13,O-14,J-16,M-17)
21. What is meant by super conductivity? Pg .50(O-13)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
13 MJK

22. An incandescent lamp is operated at 240 V and the current is 0.5 A.What is the resistance of the
lamp ? pg no.69( M-14 )
23. 1.5 V carbon-zinc dry cell is connected across a load of 1000Ω.Calculate current and power
supplied to it. (J-14 )
24. A cell has a potential difference of 6 V in an open circuit, but it falls to 4 V when a current of
2A is drawn from it. Find the internal resistance of the cell. (O-15)
25. A 10Ω resistance is connected in series with a cell of emf 10 V.A voltmeter is connected in
parallel to a cell, and it reads 9.9 V.Find the internal resistance of the cell. (M-16)
26. Define current density. Give its unit page no 47(O-16)
27. Difference between primary and secondary cell pg 66 (O-16)

28. How much time 1020 electrons will take to flow through a point, so that the current is
200 mA? (e = 1.6 x 10-19 C) pg 85 (M-17)

10. Define electrochemical equivalent of a substance. page no.63

11. What are primary cells? Give examples. page no.66
12. Why automobile batteries have low internal resistance? page no.68

5 marks
1. Write any five applications of superconductors. (O-8,M-9,J-11,O-12,M-13,J-14,O-14,M-16)
2. Explain the action of a lead-acid accumulator. (O-07,15)
3. How will you compare the e.m.f.s of two cells using a potentiometer? (M-7,O-10,11,M-12,14,17)
4. If two or more resistors are connected in parallel, derive an expression for the effective
resistance. (O-06,15)
5. Define mobility. Establish a relation between drift velocity and current. (M-6,O-14,J-16)
6. Obtain the condition for bridge balance in wheatstone bridge.(M-6,J-6,O-6,M-8,J-9,M-10,15,17)
7. Explain the construction and working of Daniel cell. (O-08,J-09,10,M-11,14)
8. Explain the working of a Lechlanche cell with a diagram. (J-07,O-12,13)
9. State Faraday’s second law of electrolysis. How is it verified experimentally?
(J-06,M-08,11,O-13,16)
10. Explain the determination of the internal resistance of a cell using voltmeter
(J-08,O-09,J-11,M-13,J-13,15)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
14 MJK

11. In the given network, calculate the effective resistance between the points A and B. (M-07)

10
10 10
5 5 5

A B

10 10 10 5

5 5
12. Explain the principle of a potentiometer. (O-07,J-14,15,16)
-6 2
13. A copper wire of 10 m area of cross-section, carries a current of 2A. If the number
of electrons per cubic metre is 8 x 1028 , calculate the current density and average
drift velocity (Given e = 1.6 x 10-19 C) (M-09)
14. The effective resistances are 10 and 2.4 when two resistors are connected in series
and in parallel. What are the resistances of individual resistors? (M-07,10,O-11)
15. Three resistors are connected in series with 10V supply as shown in the figure.
Find the voltage drop across each resistor. page no 7 (J-10,M-12)
R1=5 R2 =3 R3 = 2

www.Padasalai.Net 10V
(or)
What is the drift velocity of an electron in a copper conductor having are 10 x 10-6m2,
carrying a current of 2A . Assume that there are 10 x 1028 electrons/m3. (J-10)
16. State and explain kirchoff’s Voltage law for electrical network. (J-07,O-16)
17. State Faraday’s first law of electrolysis and describe the experimental verification.
(J-08,O-09,M-16)
18. Find the current flowing across three resistors 3Ω,5Ω and 2Ω connected in parallel to 15 V
supply. Also find the effective resistance and total current drawn from the supply. (O-10)
19. In a metre bridge,the balancing length for a 10Ω resistance in left gap is 51.8cm.Find the
unknown resistance and specific resistance of a wire of length 108 cm and radius 0.2mm
(O-10,J-12)
20. An iron box of 400W power is used daily for 30 minutes. If the cost per unit is 75 paise.
Find the weekly expense on using the iron box. (J-12)
21. Discuss the variation of resistance with temperature with an expression and a graph. (J-12)
22. Derive an expression of resistance in series and resistance in parallel.
23. Explain the construction and working of Voltaic cell.
24. The resistance of a field coil measures 50 at 20°C and 60 at 70°C.Find the temperature
coefficient of resistance (J-13)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
15 MJK

3. EFFECTS OF ELECTRIC CURRENT

1. Joule’s law of heating is (Mar 08)
2
I
a) H  t b) H = V2 Rt c) H = VIt d) H = IR2t
R
2. Nichrome wire is used as the heating element because it has (J- 06, 08, M- 12,O- 12,M-14)
a) low specific resistance b) low melting point
c) high specific resistance d) high conductivity
3. Peltier coefficient at a junction of a thermocouple depends on (J- 09, 12, O- 10,J-13)
a) the current in the thermocouple b) the time for which current flows
c) the temperature of the junction d) the charge that passes through the thermocouple
4. In a thermocouple, the temperature of the cold junction is 20C, the neutral temperature is
270C. The temperature of inversion is (J- 08, O- 08, M-10,J-14)
a) 520C b) 540C c) 500C d) 510C

5. Which of the following equations represents Biot-savart law? (M- 10)

 Idl  Idl sin  ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ × 𝐼⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ × ⃗
a) dB  0 2 b) dB  0 c) ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ = d) ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗ =
4 r 4 r2
6. Magnetic induction due to an infinitely long straight conductor placed in a medium of
permeability  is (J- 11)
 I  I I I
a) 0 b) 0 c) d)
4a 2a 4a 2a
7. In a tangent galvanometer, for a constant current, the deflection is 300. The plane of the coil is

www.Padasalai.Net
8.
rotated through 900. Now, for the same current, the deflection will be
a) 300 b) 600 c) 900 d) 00
The period of revolution of a charged particle inside a cyclotron does not depend on (M- 11,13)
a) the magnetic induction b) the charge of the particle
(J- 07,O-13)

c) the velocity of the particle d) the mass of the particle

9. The torque on a rectangular coil placed in a uniform magnetic field is large, when (O-14)
a) the number of turns is large b) the number of turns is less
c) the plane of the coil is perpendicular to the field d) the area of the coil is small
10. Phosphor – bronze wire is used for suspension in a moving coil galvanometer, because it has
a) high conductivity b) high resistivity (O- 09,13)
c) large couple per unit twist d) small couple per unit twist
11. Of the following devices, which has small resistance? (J- 06, 12, M- 09,O- 12)
a) moving coil galvanometer b) ammeter of range 0 – 1A
c) ammeter of range 0 – 10A d) voltmeter
12. A galvanometer of resistance G  is shunted with S . The effective resistance of the
combination is Ra. Then, which of the following statements is true?
a) G is less than S b) S is less than Ra but greater than G.
c) Ra is less than both G and S d) S is less than both G and Ra.
13. An ideal voltmeter has (O- 07, J- 10, 11,O-14)
a) zero resistance b) finite resistance less than G but greater than zero
c) resistance greater than G but less than infinity d) infinite resistance

ANSWERS

1.(c) 2.(c) 3.(c) 4.(a) 5.(d) 6.(d) 7.(d) 8.(c) 9.(a) 10.(d) 11.(c) 12.(c) 13.(d)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
16 MJK

1. The unit of reduction factor of tangent galvanometer is (Mar 06)

a) no unit b) tesla c) ampere d) ampere / degree
2. A galvanometer is converted into a voltmeter by connecting a (Mar 06)
a) low resistance in series b) high resistance in parallel
c) high resistance in series d) high resistance in parallel
3. In a thermocouple, the temperature of the cold junction is 20C, the inversion temperature is
600oC, then the neutral temperature is (Oct 06)
a) 310C b) 320C c) 300C d) 315C
4. In a tangent galvanometer a current 1A, produces a deflection of 30. The current required to
produce a deflection of 60 is (Oct 06)
a) 3A b) 2A c) 3 A d) 1/ 3 A
5. Peltier effect is the converse of (Mar 07)
a) Joule effect b) Raman effect c) Thomson effect d) Seebeck effect
6. The torque experienced by a rectangular current loop placed perpendicular to a uniform
magnetic field is (Mar 07)
a) maximum b) minimum c) finite minimum d) zero
7. In which of the following pairs of metals of a thermocouple the e.m.f is maximum? (J- 07)
a) Fe-Cu b) Cu-Zn c) Pt-Ag d) Sb-Bi
8. Which of the following principle is used in a thermopile? (Oct 07)
a) Thomson effect b) Peltier effect c) Seebeck effect d) Joule’s effect
9. Fuse wire is an alloy of (M- 08,J-14)

www.Padasalai.Net
10.

11.
a) Lead and Tin
Thermopile is used to
a) measure temperature
c) detect thermal radiation
b) Tin and Copper c) Lead and Copper d) Lead and Iron

b) measure current
d) measure pressure
The resistance of the filament of a 110 W, 220 V electric bulb is
(O- 08)

(M-09)
a) 440  b) 220 c) 484 d) 848 
12. The magnitude and direction of the magnetic Lorentz force is given by (J- 09)
⃗⃗⃗
a) = ( × ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗
b) = q/( × ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗
c) = q( × ⃗ ⃗⃗⃗
d) = v( × ⃗
13. Unit of Peltier co-efficient is (O- 09)
a) ohm b) mho c) volt d) ampere
14. For a given thermocouple the neutral temperature (J- 10)
a) depends upon the temperature of cold junction
b) depends upon the temperature of hot junction
c) is a constant
d) depends upon the temperature of cold junction and the temperature of hot junction
15. When the number of turns (n) in a galvanometer is doubled, current sensitivity (O- 10,15)
a) remains constant b) decreases twice
c) increases twice d) increases four times
16. An electron is moving with a velocity of 3x106ms-1 perpendicular to a uniform magnetic
field of induction 0.5 T. The force experienced by the electron is (M- 11)
a) 2.4x10-13N b) 13.6x10-27N c) 13.6x10-11N d) zero
17. Fuse wire (O- 11)
a) is an alloy of lead and copper b) has low resistance
c) has high resistance d) has high melting point
18. In a thermocouple the temperature of cold junction is – 300C and the neutral temperature
is 2700C. The inversion of temperature is (O- 11)
a) 5200C b) 5400C c) 5000C d) 5700C

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
17 MJK

19. Which of the following produces large joule heating effect? (M- 12)
a) 1A current through 2  resistor for 3 seconds
b) 1A current through 3  resistor for 2 seconds
c) 2A current through 1  resistor for 2 seconds
d) 3A current through 1  resistor for 1 seconds
20 In the experiment to verify Joule’s law when the current passed through the circuit is doubled
keeping resistance (R) and time of passage of current(t) constant,temperature of the liquid (O-12)
a)increase twice b)increase four times
c)increase sixteen times d)decrease four times
21. Which of the following devices has a source of emf inside it? (M-13)
a)Voltmeter b)Ammeter c)Ohmmeter d)Rectifier
22. AB is a rod of lead. The end A is heated, A current I is allowed to flow along AB,Now due
to Thomson effect,in rod AB: (J-13)
a)heat is absorbed b)heat is liberated
c)heat is neither absorbed nor liberated d)heat is first absorbed and then liberated
23. Consider a circular coil of radius 10cm in air medium. If 5A current passes through it,what
would be the magnetic induction at its centre ? (M-14)
a) x 10-5 T b) x 10 5 T c) x 10-15 T d) x 10 - 6 T
24. In Joule’s calorimeter experiment,when a current of 1 ampere is passed through a coil for a
known interval of time ‘t’ , the temperature of water increases from 30° C to 33° C .When a
current of 2A is passed through the same coil placed in the same quantity of water and for the
same time,the temperature of water increases from 30 °C to (M-15)
a) 33° C b) 36° C c) 39° C d) 42° C
25. A proton and an α particle are projected with the same velocity normal to a uniform magnetic

www.Padasalai.Net
26.
field.The ratio of the magnetic Lorentz force experienced by the proton and the α particle is

a) 1:1 b) 1:2 c) 2:1 d) 1:0

(J-15)

A wire of length 1m is made into a circular loop and it carries a current of 3.14 A.The magnetic
dipole moment of the current loop ( in A m2 ) (M-16)
a) 1 b) 0.5 c) 0.25 d) 0.314

27. In a thermocouple, when the temperature of cold iunction is increased( but less than
neutral temperature) the temperature of inversion is (O-16)
a) Increases b) decreases c) does not change d) 1stincreases and then decreases

ANSWERS

1.(c) 2.(c) 3.(a) 4.(a) 5.(d) 6.(d) 7.(d) 8.(c) 9.(a) 10.(c) 11.(a)
12.(c) 13.(c) 14.(c) 15.(c) 16.(a) 17.(c) 18.(d) 19.(d) 20.(b) 21.(c) 22.(c)
23.(a) 24.(d) 25.(b) 26.(c) 27.(a)

3 MARKS ( 1 X 3 = 3 )

1. Define peltier coefficient and write its unit. pg no.84 (J-06,J-11,M-12,14)

2. Mention any two differences between peltier effect and Joule’s heating effect. 82,84(M-06)
3. How is a galvanometer converted into a) an ammeter b) a voltmeter? pg no.106,108 (J-09)
4. In a galvanometer, increasing the current sensitivity does not necessarily increase the voltage
sensitivity. Explain pg no.106 (M-07,J-13)
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
18 MJK

5. Why nichrome is used as a heating element? OR What are the characteristics of

heating element used in electric heating device? pg no.81 (J-07,M-10,O-15,M-17)
6. Calculate the resistance of the filament of a 100 W, 220 V electric bulb. pg no.112 (O-07)
7. What is neutral temperature of a thermocouple? pg no.83 (O-08)
8. Define ampere in terms of force. pg no.102 (M-08,J-08,O-14)
9. What is Thomson co-efficient?Write its unit. pg no.84 (O-12,J-15)
10. State Ampere’s circuital law. pg no.92 (M-09,0-11,J-14)
11. How can we increase the current sensitivity of a galvanometer? pg no.106 (O-09)
12. State Fleming ‘s left hand rule. pg no.100 (O-10,M-15)
13. State Tangent law. pg no.91 (M-11,O-16)
14. Mention the limitations of cyclotron. pg .99(O-06,J-10,M-13)
15. Define the magnetic moment of a current loop. pg no.109
16. Define current sensitivity of a galvanometer? pg no.106
17. A conducor of length 50 cm carrying a current of 5A is placed perpendicular to a magnetic
-3
field of induction 2 x 10 T.Find the force on the conductor. Pg no.126 (O-13)
18. Calculate the magnetic induction at a point 10cm from a long straight wire placed in air carrying a
current of 10A (M-16)
19. What is seeback effect ? (J-16)

www.Padasalai.Net
OTHER IMPORTANT QUESTIONS
1. State Joule’s law page no.79
2. What is peltier effect? page no.82
3. How does an electric bulb works? page no.81
4. What do you mean by fuse wire? page no.81
5. What is temperature of inversion? page no.83
6. What is Thomson effect? page no.84
7. What is thermopile? page no.85
8. State Maxwell’s right hand cork screw rule. page no.87
9. State Biot –savart law. page no.88
10. State End rule. page no.95
11. How is galvanometer is converted into voltmeter ? pg no. 108

5 MARKS
1. A rectangular coil of 500 turns and of area 6x 10-4 m2 is suspended inside a radial magnetic
field of induction 10-4 T by a suspension wire of torsional constant 5x 10-10 Nm per degree.
Calculate the current required to produce deflection of 10 . (J-06,O-09,M-13,O-15)
2. A moving coil galvanometer of resistance 20 produces full scale deflection for a current
of 50mA. How will you convert the galvanometer into (i) an ammeter of range 20A and
(ii) a voltmeter of range 120 volt? (M-07, 09, J-13,M-15)
3. A circular coil of radius 20 cm has 100 turns of wire and it carries a current of 5A. Find
the magnetic induction at a point along its axis at a distance of 20 cm from the centre
of the coil. (M-06,O-06,M-09,J-15,M-17)
4. Explain the conversion of a galvanometer into an ammeter. (M-08,J-12,O-13)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
19 MJK

5. What are the special features of magnetic Lorentz force? (J-07,M-11,16)

6. A long straight wire carrying current produces a magnetic induction of 4 x 106 T at a point
15 cm from the wire. Calculate the current through the wire. (O-07)
16
7. In a hydrogen atom electron moves in an orbit of radius 0.5Å making 10 revolutions per
second. Determine the magnetic moment associated with orbital motion of the electron.
(Given e = 1.6 x 10 -19 C) (J-08)
8. State and explain Biot-Savart law. (J-09)
9. Explain how you will convert a galvanometer into a voltmeter. (M-10,J-11,M-12)
10. Two parallel wires each of length 5m are placed at a distance of 10cm apart in air.
They carry equal currents along the same direction and experience a mutually attractive
force of 3.6 x 10-4 N. Find the current through the conductors. (O-09,J-10,M-13,O-16)
11. Explain in the construction of a tangent galvanometer. (O-08)
12. A galvanometer has a resistance of 40. It shows full scale deflection for a current of 2mA.
How will you convert the galvanometer into a voltmeter of range 0 to 20 V ? (O-10,J-16)
13. Two straight infinitely long parallel wires carrying equal current placed at a distance of
-5
20 cm apart experience a mutually attractive force of 4.9 x 10 N per unit length of the
wire.Calculate the current. (O-11)
14. The deflection of a galvanometer falls from 50 divisions to 10 divisions when 12
resistance when 12 resistance is connected across the galvanometer .Calculate the
galvanometer resistance. (O-12)
15. A current of 4A flows through 5 turn coil of a tangent galvanometer having a diameter of

www.Padasalai.Net
30 cm.If the horizontal component of Earth’s magnetic induction is 4 x 10-5 T,find the
deflection produced in the coil (Given = × −
Hm-1 ) (M-14 )

16. A rectangular coil of area 20 cm x 10 cm with 100 turns of wire is suspended in a radial
magnetic field of induction 5 x 10-3 T.If the galvanometer shows an angular deflection of 15°
for a current of 1mA,find the torsional constant of the suspension wire. (J-14)
17. In a tangent galvanometer, a current of 1A produces a deflection of 30. Find the current
required to produce a deflection of 60. (O-14)
18. A stream of deutrons is projected with a velocity of 104 ms-1 in XY – plane. A uniform magnetic
field of induction field of induction 10-3 T acts along the Z – axis. Find the radius of the circular
path of the particle. (Mass of deuteron is 3.32 x 10-27 kg and charge of deuteron is 1.6 x 10-19C)
(M-17)

10 MARKS
1. Discuss the motion of a charged particle in a uniform magnetic field.
Define magnetic Lorentz force. (J – 10,M-13,J-14,O-15)
2. Explain the principle, construction, working and limitations of a cyclotron with a neat
diagram. (M - 07, O-10, O -11, J-13,15,M-16)
3. Obtain an expression for the torque experienced by a current loop in a uniform magneticfield
4. Obtain expression for a magnetic induction due at a point to infinitely long straight
conductor carrying current. (J - 06, O - 09, M – 10, O-13,M-15.17)
5. Apply Biot – Savart law, obtain an expression for the magnetic induction at a point due
to infinitely long straight conductor carrying current. (M - 06)
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
20 MJK

6. Define ampere’s circuit law. Applying it find the magnetic induction at a point due to a
long solenoid carrying current. (O - 06, J - 09)
7. State Joule’s law. Explain Joule’s calorimeter experiment to verify Joule’s law of heating.
(J - 07, J - 12)
8. Deduce the relation for the magnetic induction, at a point along the axis of a circular coil
carrying current. (O - 07, M – 08, M – 12,O-14)
9. State Tangent law. Explain in detail the principle, construction and theory of a tangent
galvanometer. (J - 08)
10. Deduce expression for the force on a current carrying conductor placed in a magnetic field.
Find the magnitude of the force. (O - 08, M - 09, J - 11, O -12,M-14)
11. Obtain an expression for the force between two long parallel current carrying conductors.
Hence define “ampere ’’. (M – 11,J-16)

4. ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION AND ALTERNATING CURRENT

1. Electromagnetic induction is not used in (M- 06, 08, 12, J- 07, 08, 09, 12, O- 08, 11,M-14)
a) transformer b) room heater c) AC generator d) choke coil
2
2. A coil of area of cross section 0.5 m with 10 turns is in a plane which is pendendicular to an
uniform magnetic field of 0.2 Wb/m2. The flux through the coil is (June 09)
a) 100 Wb b) 10 Wb c) 1 Wb d) zero

www.Padasalai.Net
3.

4.
Lenz’s law is in accordance with the law of
a) conservation of charges
c) conservation of momentum

a) zero b) infinity
(Mar 07, 08, 11, 12, June 12,O-13)
b) conservation of flux
d) conservation of energy
The self-inductance of a straight conductor is (M- 07, 09, J- 10, O- 11, J- 12,M- 13,J-13,M-15)
c) very large d) very small
5. The unit henry can also be written as (June 06, 11, Oct 11,J-14)
-1 -1
a) Vs A b) Wb A c) s d) all
6. An emf of 12 V is induced when the current in the coil changes at the rate of 40 A s-1.The
coefficient of self induction of the coil is (Oct 09, 10, Mar 11)
a) 0.3 H b) 0.003 H c) 30 H d) 4.8 H
7. A DC of 5 A produces the same heating effect as an AC of (Oct 08, Mar 09,J-13)
a) 50 A rms current b) 5 A peak current
c) 5 A rms current d) none of these
8. Transformer works on (Mar 07, 11, Oct 07, June 10,M-14,O-14)
a) AC only b) DC only
c) both AC and DC d) AC more effectively than DC
9. The part of the AC generator that passes the current from the coil to the external circuit is
a) field magnet b) split rings c)slip rings d)brushes (M-10,Oct-12,13,J-14)

10. In an AC circuit the applied emf e = E0 sin (t + /2) leads the current I = I0 sin (t – /2) by
(Oct 06)
a)  / 2 b)  / 4 c)  d) 0
11. Which of the following cannot be stepped up in a transformer? (J- 08, Oct 09,J-14)
a) input current b) input voltage c) input power d) all
12. The power loss is less in transmission lines when (Oct 06,Mar 13)
a) voltage is less but current is more b) both voltage and current are more
c) voltage is more but current is less d) both voltage and current are less
13. Which of the following devices does not allow d.c. to pass through?
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
21 MJK

(J- 09, 11, 12, M- 10, 12, O-10 ,12M-13,J-13)

a) resistor b) capacitor c) inductor d) all the above
14. In an ac circuit (Mar 09, Oct 11,M-14)
a) the average value of current is zero b) the average value of square of current is zero
c) the average power dissipation is zero d) the rms current is 2 time of peak current

ANSWERS

1.(b) 2.(c) 3.(d) 4.(a) 5.(d) 6.(a) 7.(c) 8.(a) 9.(d) 10.(c) 11.(c) 12.(c) 13.(b) 14.(a)

b) voltage and current are in phase

(J- 06, O- 10)

(J- 06)

c) voltage leads current by  d) current lags voltage by /2.

6. In LCR series a.c. circuit, the phase difference between current and voltage is 30. The reactance
of the circuit is 17.32. The value of resistance is (J- 06, M- 07,O-13)
a) 30 b) 10 c) 17.32 d) 1.732
7. The generator rule is (O- 06, J- 07)
a) Fleming’s left hand rule b) Fleming’s right hand rule
c) Maxwell’s right hand cork screw rule d) right hand palm rule
8. In LCR circuit, when XL = Xc, the current is (M- 07,O-15)
a) 0 b) is in phase with the voltage c) leads the voltage d) lags the voltage
9. In a series LCR circuit, at resonance (O- 10)
a) XL = Xc b) XL > Xc c) XL < Xc d)  = 1/LC
10. In an AC circuit with capacitor only, if the frequency of the signal is zero, then the
capacitive reactance is (J- 07)
a) infinity b) zero c) finite maximum d) finite minimum
11. In step-up transformer the output voltage is 11kV and the input voltage is 220V. The ratio
of number of turns of secondary to primary is (J- 07)
a) 20 : 1 b) 22 : 1 c) 50 : 1 d) 1 : 50
12. The reactance offered by 300 mH inductor to an AC supply of frequency 50Hz is (O- 07)
a) 1046  b) 94.2 c) 9420 d) 104.6
13. The r.m.s value of an a.c. voltage with a peak value of 311V is (O- 07,15)
a) 110 V b) 220V c) 50V d) 70.7V

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
22 MJK

14. The core used in audio frequency chokes is (O- 07)

a) iron b) carbon c) lead d) steel
15. In a transformer, eddy current loss is minimized by using ( M- 08,J-14)
a) Laminated core made of Mumetal b) Laminated core made of stelloy
c) Shell type core d) Thick copper wires
16. A power of 11,000 W is transmitted at 220 V. The current through line wires is (M-08)
a) 50A b) 5A c) 500A d) 0.5A
17. For a d.c. circuit value of capacitive reactance (Xc) is (J- 08)

a) zero b) infinity c) d) 
2
18. The Q factor (quality factor) of an a.c. circuit containing a resistance R,
inductance L and capacitor C is (J-08, M- 09,J-15)
1 1 C 1 L 1
a) Q = b) Q = c) Q = d) Q =
LC R L R C LR
19. In RLC series circuit, at resonance (O- 08, 10)
a) current is minimum b) impedance is maximum
c) circuit is purely inductive d) current is in phase with the voltage
20. In a three phase AC generator the three coils are fastened rigidly together and are displaced
from each other by an angle (O- 08)
a) 90 b) 180 c) 120 d) 360
21. A DC(direct current) of 5A produces the same heating effect as an A.C.(alternating current )of
a)50A rms current b)5A peak current (M-09)
c)15 A rms current d)none of these

www.Padasalai.Net
22. In LCR series circuit, at resonance
a) impedance (Z) is maximum
c) impedance (Z) is equal to R
b) current is minimum
d)   
I
LC
(O- 09)

23. A coil of area of cross section 0.5 m2 with 10 turns is in a plane which is parallel to an uniform
magnetic field of 0.2 Wb/m2. The flux through the coil is (M- 10)
a) 100 Wb b) 10 Wb c) 1 Wb d) zero

24. The part of the AC generator that passes the current from the coil to the external circuit is
a) field magnet b) split rings c) slip rings d) brushes (M-10)
25. The r.m.s. value of the alternating current (AC) flowing through a resistor is 5 A. Its peak value is
a) 3.536 A b) 70.7 A c) 7.07 A d)7A (M- 10)

26. In an A.C. circuit average power consumed is 200 W and the apparent power is 300 W.
The power factor is (J-10)
a) 1.5 b) 0.66 c) 0.33 d) 1
27. The effective value of alternating current is (J-10)
I I
a) 0 b) 0 c) I 0 2 d) 2 I 0
2 2
28. A rectangular coil is uniformly rotated in a uniform magnetic field such that the axis of rotation
is perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic field. When the plane of the coil is
perpendicular to the magnetic field (O-10)
a) (i) magnetic flux is zero, (ii) induced e.m.f is zero
b) (i) magnetic flux is maximum, (ii) induced e.m.f. is maximum
c) (i) magnetic flux is maximum, (ii) induced e.m.f. is zero
d) (i) magnetic flux is zero, (ii) induced e.m.f. is maximum.

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
23 MJK


29. In an a.c. circuit, the voltage leads the current by a phase of , then the circuit has (M-11)
2
a) only an inductor (L) b) only a capacitor (C)
c) only a resistor ( R) d) L,C and R is series
30. The resonant frequency of RLC circuit is   . The inductance is doubled. The capacitance is
also doubled. Now the resonant frequency of the circuit is (J- 11)
  
a) 2   b)  c)  d) 
2 4 2
31. When the frequency of an a.c. circuit increases, the capacitive reactance offered by capacitor
connected in the circuit (J- 11)
a) increases b) decreases c) remains the same d) becomes zero
32. The coefficient of self –induction of a solenoid is independent of (O-12)
a)the number of turns in coil b)the area of cross-section of the coil
c)the length of the coil d)the current passing through the coil
33. The direction of force on a current carrying conductor placed in a magnetic field is given by
a)Fleming’s Left Hand Rule b)Fleming’s Right Hand Rule (M- 13)
c)End Rule d)Right Hand Palm Rule
34. In a series RLC a.c.circuit,the instantaneous values of current and emf are i=I0 sin (𝜔 − ) and
e = E0 sin𝜔 respectively.The phase difference between current and voltage is: (J-13)
a)zero b)180° c)60° d)45°

35. An emf of 25V is induced when the current in the coil changes at the rate of 100A s-1.The
coefficient of self induction of the coil is

www.Padasalai.Net
( Mar 14)
a) 0.3 H b) 0.25 H c) 2.5H d) 0.25 H
36. In LCR series a.c. circuit, the phase difference between current and voltage is 60. The reactance
of the circuit is 17.32. The value of resistance is (O-14)
a) 30 b) 17.32 c)10 d) 1.732

37. In an AC circuit,the instantaneous value of emf and current are respectively (M-15)
e = 200 sin (𝜔 − ) ; I = 10 (𝜔 + ) The phase relation between current and voltage is
a) voltage lags behind current by a phase angle of
b) current leads voltage by a phase angle of
c) current leads voltage by a phase angle of
d) voltage leads current by a phase angle of

38. If the frequency of AC circuit connected with an inductor of inductance 0.03 H only is
50Hz,then inductive reactance is (J-15)

a) 3.14Ω b) 9.42 Ω c) 9Ω d) 6.28 Ω

39. The unit of the number of electric lines of force passing through a given area is (J-15)
a) No unit b) NC-1 c) Nm2C-1 d) Nm
40. The instantaneous emf and current equations of an RLC series circuit are e= 200sin[𝜔 − ]
i=20 sin[𝜔 + ].The average power consumed per cycle is : ( M-16)
a)Zero b) 2000W c) 1000W d) 500W
41. A rectangular coil of wire is placed in a uniform magnetic field such that the plane of the coil is
parallel to the magnetic field.The magnetic flux linked with the coil and the emf induced are
respectively (M-16)
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
24 MJK

a) zero and zero b) zero and maximum

c) maximum and zero d) maximum and maximum
42. In an A.C. circuit containing only a capacitor ,the instantaneous current is given by the equation
i=I0 sin (𝜔 + ).The instantaneous emf is given by the equation (J-16)

a) e = E0 sin𝜔 b)e=E0 sin (𝜔 − ). c) e=E0 sin (𝜔 + ). d) e=E0 sin (𝜔 + ).

43. The instantaneous current in an AC circuit containing a pure inductor is i=I0 sin 𝜔 .
The instantaneous emf is (O-16)
a) e=E0 sin (𝜔 + ). b) e=E0 sin (𝜔 − ). c) e=E0 sin (𝜔 − ) d) e=E0 sin (𝜔 − ).
44. In RLC series AC circuit at resonance (O-16)
a) Resistance is zero b) Net reactance is zero
c) impedance is maximum d) voltage leads the current by a phase angle of
45. An LCR series circuit is connected to 240 V A.C supply.At resonance,the values of V R , VL and
VC are respectively (M-17)
a) 80V,80V and 80V b) 120V ,60V and 60V
c) 240V ,120V and 120V d) 180V ,40V and 40V

ANSWERS

1.(b) 2.(c) 3.(b) 4.(a) 5.(d) 6.(a) 7.(b) 8.(b) 9.(a) 10.(a) 11.(c) 12.(b)
13.(b) 14.(a) 15.(b) 16.(a) 17.(b) 18.(c) 19.(d) 20.(c) 21.(d) 22.(c) 23.(d) 24.(d)
25.(c) 26.(b) 27.(b) 28.(c) 29.(a) 30.(b) 31.(b) 32.(d) 33.(a) 34.(c) 35.(b) 36.(c)

www.Padasalai.Net
37.(c) 38.(b) 39.(c) 40.(c) 41.(a) 42.(b) 43.(a) 44.(b) 45.(c)

3 MARKS (2 X 3 =6 )
1. Calculate the mutual inductance between two coils when a current of 4A changing to
8A in 0.5 s in one coil, induces an e.m.f. of 50 mV in the other coil pg 152(M-06,J-15)
2. Mention the methods of producing induced e.m.f. pg no.131 (M-06,O-10,M-11,M-12,16,J-16)
3. State Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction. pg no.124 (J-06,O-13,14)
4. An aircraft having a wing span of 20.48 m flies due north at a speed of 40 ms-1. Component
of earth’s magnetic field at the place is 2x 10-5 T; calculate the e.m.f. induced between
the ends of the wings. pg no151 (J-06,M-08,O-10,M-11,M-16)
5. Define quality factor. pg no. 148 (O-06,J-11,12,O-12,J-13,M-15)
6. The wings of an aeroplane are 10 m apart. The plane is moving horizontally towards
the north at a place where the vertical component of earth’s magntic field is 3x10-5 T.
Calculate the induced e.m.f. set up between the tips of the wings if the velocity of the
aeroplane is 720 km/hr. (O-06)
7. State Fleming’s right hand rule. pg no. 125 (M-07,O-09,M-10,J-11,M-17)
2
8. A coil of area of cross-section 0.5m with 10 turns is in a plane perpendicular to a uniform
magnetic field of 0.2 Wb/m2. Calculate the flux though the coil. (M-07)
9. Define r.m.s. value of alternating current. pg no. 141 (J-07,O-09,M-13,J-14)
10. Why can a d.c. ammeter not read a.c.? (O-07)
11. What is electromagnetic induction? pg no. 122 (J-07,O-07,M-08,O-16)
12. Give the differences between AF choke and RF choke. pg no. 151 (J-08,M-09)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
25 MJK

13. A capacitor of capacitance 2F is in a.c. circuit of frequency 1000 Hz. If the r.m.s value
of the applied e.m.f is 10 V , find the effective current flowing in the circuit.
pg 153 (J-08,09, O-13)
14. State Lenz’s law in electromagnetic induction. pg no. 124 (O-08,J-10,M-14)
15. An ideal transformer has transformation ratio 1:20. If the input power and primary voltage
are 600 mW and 6V respectively, find the primary and secondary currents. (O-08,M-09)
16. Define coefficient of self induction. pg no. 126(J-09,O-15)
17. Calculate the capacitive reactance of a capacitor of capacitance 2F in an A.C. circuit of
frequency 1000HZ. (J-09,O-15)
18. An e.m.f. of 5V is induced when the current in the coil changes at the rate of 100 As-1.
Find the coefficient of self-induction of the coil. (M-10)
19. Define magnetic flux.Give its unit. pg no.122
20. Write the equation of a 25 cycle current sine wave having rms value of 30 A (O-11,M-12,J-13)
21. What is capacitive reactance? pg no.145 (O-11)
22. Define unit of self inductance.or One henry pg no.138 (J-12)
23. Define efficiency of transformer. pg no.138 (O-12,J-15,16)
24. A solenoid of length 1m and 0.05 m diameter has 500 turns.If a current of 2A passes through
the coil,calculate the coefficient of self induction of the coil. pg no151 (M-13)
25. Magnetic field through a coil having 200 turns and cross sectional area 0.04 m2 changes from
0.1wbm-2 to 0.04 wbm-2 in 0.02 sec .Find the induced emf. pg no151 (M -14 )
26. 11K W power is transmitted at 22000 V through a wire of resistance 2Ω .Calculate power loss.

www.Padasalai.Net
27.
(J-14)
Two rails of a railway track insulated from each other and the ground are connected to a milli
voltmeter. The train runs at a speed of 180 Km/hr. Vertical component of earth’s magnetic field
is 0.2 x 10-4 Wb/m2 and the rails are separated by 1m. Find the reading of the voltmeter. (O-14)
28. An a.c generator consists of a coil 10,000 turns and of area 100 cm2. The coil rotates at an
angular speed of 140 rpm in a uniform magnetic field 3.6 x 10-2 T.
Find the maximum value of the emf induced. (M-15,17)
29. Calculate the power loss in the form of heat when a power of 11,000 W is transrnitted
at 220 V (O-16)
OTHER IMPORTANT QUESTIONS
1. Define self-induction. Give its unit page no.125
2. Define coefficient of mutual induction. page no.128
3. What is a poly phase AC generator? page no. 135
4. What is inductive reactance? page no.144
5. Mention the difference between a step up and step down transformer.
6. What is resonant frequency in LCR circuit. page no.148
7. Define power factor. page no.150
8. Capacitor blocks d.c but allows a.c. Explain. Pg 145,146
9. What happens to the value of current in RLC series circuit, if frequency of the source
is increased? page no 147
10. Differentiate between self-inductance and mutual inductance.
11. Define mutual induction. page no128
12. What are eddy currents? page no136
13. Define alternating current and give its expression pg 141(I=IO sin𝝎t )
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
26 MJK

14. What is an acceptor circuit? page no 147

5 MARKS
1. State Faraday’s laws and lenz’s law of electromagnetic induction. (J-11)
2. What are the reasons for various energy losses in a transformer? Explain how they can be
minimized. (J-06,O-06,09,10,J-10,M-11,13,O-14,M-15)
3. Explain how an e.m.f. can be induced by changing the area enclosed by the coil in a
uniform magnetic field. (J-07,O-07,08,M-09,O-12,J-13,15,O-15)
4. Explain the mutual induction between two long solenoids. Obtain an expression for the
mutual inductance of two long solenoids. (J-08,M-12,O-16)
5. Give the applications of eddy currents.or Explain any two applications of eddy current.
(M-07,10,J-14)
2
6. An a.c. generator consists of a coil of 10,000 turns and of area 100 cm . The coil rotates
at an angular speed of 140 r.p.m. in a uniform magnetic field of 3.6 x 10-2 T. Find the
maximum value of the e.m.f. induced. (J-09)
7. Obtain the phase relation between current and voltage in an a.c. circuit with an inductor
only(graph not necessary) (M-06,08)
8. Obtain an expression for the current flowing in a circuit containing resistance only
to which alternating emf is applied.Find the phase relationship between voltage
and current. (O-11,J-12,M-16)

www.Padasalai.Net
9.
10.
11.
Obtain expression for self inductance of a long solenoid.
Explain the construction and working of a choke coil.
Obtain an expression for Energy associated with an inductor.
(M-14,J-16,M-17)

(J-07,M-09,O-13)

10MARKS
1. Principle, construction, theory of working of transformer of a transformer.
Define its efficiency. Mention the energy losses. (M - 06, M – 12,O-13)
2. Describe principle, construction, and working of a single phase Alternating Current generator.
(M - 07, M - 08, J - 07, O - 07 O - 10, J - 11, M -11, J – 12, J-13,M-14,16)
3. Discuss with theory the method of inducing e.m.f in a coil by changing its orientation with
respect to the direction of the magnetic field. (J - 8, O- 9, J -10, O -11, M – 11,M-13,O-14,M-15)
4. Obtain the phase relation between voltage and current in an A.C circuit containing a pure
inductance. Draw the necessary graph. (O – 08,16)
5. What are eddy current? Explain their applications. How are they minimized? (M - 09)
6. In an ac circuit containing a capacitor, the instantaneous emf is e=Eosinωt. Obtain the
expression for instantaneous current. Explain the phase relation between emf and current by
graph. (O - 06)
7. Explain the mutual induction between two long solenoids. Obtain an expression for the
mutual inductance.
8. A source of alternating emf is connected to a series combination of a resistor R,
Inductor L, Capacitor C. Calculate the current, resultant voltage and the phase angle
between the current and the voltage. (J - 06, J – 09, O -12, J-14,15,O-15,J-16,M-17)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
27 MJK

5. ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES AND WAVE OPTICS

1. In an electromagnetic wave (J- 09,O-13,M-14,O-14)

a) power is equally transferred along the electric and magnetic fields
b) power is transmitted in a direction perpendicular to both the fields.
c) power is transmitted along electric field. d) power is transmitted along magnetic field
2. Electromagnetic waves are (Oct 09, 10, June 11,Mar 13)
a) transverse b) longitudinal
c) may be longitudinal or transverse d) neither longitudinal nor transverse.
3. Refractive index of glass is 1.5. Time taken for light to pass through a glass plate of thickness
10cm is (Mar 11,O-14)
-8 -10 -8 -10
a) 2 x 10 s b) 2 x 10 s c) 5 x 10 s d) 5 x 10 s
4. In an electromagnetic wave the phase difference between electric field → and magnetic
field → is (June 06, 08, 10, 12 Oct 08, Mar 09, 11,J-13,14)
a)  / 4 b)  / 2 c)  d) zero
5. Atomic spectrum should be (Mar 07, Oct 09 Jun 12,Oct 12,J-14)
a) pure line spectrum b) band emission spectrum
c) line absorption spectrum d) band absorption spectrum
6. When a drop of water is introduced between the glass plate and Plano convex lens in Newton’s
rings system, the ring system (Mar 06, 08June 07, 10, 11, 12,M-14)
a) contracts b) expands
c) remains same d) first expands, then contracts

www.Padasalai.Net
7. A beam of monochromatic light enters from vacuum into a medium of refractive index . The
ratio of the wavelengths of the incident and refracted waves is
a)  : 1 b) 1 :  c) 2 : 1 d) 1 : 2

8. If the wavelength of the light is reduced to one fourth, then the amount of scattering is
(June 09, Mar 10)
a) increased by 16 times b) decreased by 16 times
c) increased by 256 times d) decreased by 256 times
9. In Newton’s ring experiment the radii of the mth and (m + 4)th dark rings are respectively
5 mm and 7 mm. What is the value of m? (Oct 09,J-14)
a) 2 b) 4 c) 8 d) 10
10. The path difference between two monochromatic light waves of wavelength 4000 Å is
2 x 10-7m. The phase difference between them is (Mar 12,J-13)
a)  b) 2 c) 3 /2 d) /2
11. In Young’s experiment the third bright band for wavelength of light 6000Å coincides with
the fourth bright band for another source in the same arrangement. The wavelength of the
another source is (Oct 10)
a) 4500 Å b) 6000 Å c) 5000 Å d) 4000 Å
12. A light of wavelength 6000 Å is incident normally on a grating 0.005 m wide with 2500
lines. Then the maximum order is (Mar 08,Mar 13,O-13)
a) 3 b) 2 c) 1 d) 4
13. A diffraction pattern is obtained using a beam of red light. What happens if the red light is
replaced by blue light? (June 07, 08, Mar 11, 12 Oct 11)
a) bands disappear b) no change
c) diffraction pattern becomes narrower and crowded together
d) diffraction pattern becomes broader and farther apart
14. The refractive index of the medium, for the polarising angle 60 is (O- 08, M-10,J-13)
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
28 MJK

a) 1.732 b) 1.414 c) 1.5 d) 1.468

ANSWERS

1(b) 2(a) 3(d) 4(d) 5(a) 6(a) 7(a) 8(c) 9(d) 10(a) 11(a) 12(a) 13(c) 14(a)

46. In Young’s double slit experiment,bandwidth contains (Mar 13)

a)a bright band only b) a dark band only
c)either a bright band or a dark band d)both a bright and a dark band
47. According to Focault and Michelson experiment the velocity of light in a rarer medium is
a)greater than in a denser medium (O-13,J-15)
b) lesser than in a denser medium
c) equal to that in a denser medium
d) either greater or lesser than in a denser medium
48. The characteristic spectrum of an atom is observed as : (Mar -14)
a) pure line spectrum b) emission band spectrum
c) absorption line spectrum d) absorption band spectrum
49. Which of the following biaxial crystal is (Mar -14)
a) Calcite b) quartz c) tourmaline d) topaz
50. The scattering of sunlight by gas molecules in the earth’s atmosphere is (O -14)
a) Raman’s effect b) - scattering c) Tyndal –scattering d) Rayleigh scattring
51. A light of wavelength 4000Å after travelling a distance of 2 m produces a phase change of
a) zero b) 3 c) d) (M-15)
sin 𝑖
52. In Snell’s law of refraction = , is (J-15)
sin

a) directly proportional to sin i b) inversely proportional to sin r

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
31 MJK

c) both (a) and (b) d) independendent of (a) and (b)

53. A wave of length ‘ ′ corresponds to a phase of 2π .Calculate the phase when a distance of ‘ ’ corresponds to a
Phase of (O-15)
π λ π π
a) = x b) = x c) = x d) = x
54. A ray of light travelling in air is incident on a denser surface at an angle of 60º .If the velocity of light in the
denser medium is 2 x 108 ms-1 the angle of refraction inside the denser medium is: (M-16)
-1 -1 -1
a) 30º b)sin (0.75) c) sin ( ) d) sin (0.6666)
√
55. A ray of light is incident normally on a glass surface of refractive index 1.5.The angle of refraction is
a) 30º b)sin-1 (0.6666) c) sin-1 ( ) d) sin-1 (0.75) (J-16)
√

56. In Newton ‘s ring experiment,when a wavelength of light and a pano convex lens of radius
of curvature 50 cm is used,the radius of the 10th dark ring is √ mm.Then with the same
wavelength,a plano convex lens of radius of curvature 2m is used,the radius of the 10th dark ring is
a)3mm b) 2√ mm c) 3 √ mm d) 4√ mm (J-16)
57. Which one of the following is not an electronagnetic wave ? (O-16)
a) X – rays b) rays c) Ultra Violet rays (UV) d) - rays

58. In Raman effect, wavelength of incident light is 5890Å. The wavelength of stokes lines and
antistokes lines are respectively : (O-16)
a) 5885Å and 5880Å b) 5895Å and 5990Å
c) 5885Å and 5895Å d) 5895Å and 5885Å
59. In Raman effect, wavelength of incident light is 5890Å. The wavelength of stokes lines and

www.Padasalai.Net
60.
antistokes lines are respectively : (M - 17)
a) 5880Å and 5900Å
c) 5900Å and 5910Å
b) 5900Å and 5880Å
d) 5870Å and 5880Å
Light from a source is analysed by an analyser.When the analyser is rotated,the intensity of the
emergent light (M - 17)
a) Does not vary b) Remains uniformly dark
c) Varies between maximum and zero d) Varies between maximum and minimum

ANSWERS

1.(a) 2.(c) 3.(d) 4.(b) 5.(b) 6.(d) 7.(b) 8.(c) 9.(d) 10.(b) 11.(a) 12.(a)
13.(b) 14.(d) 15.(b) 16.(a) 17.(c) 18.(d) 19.(a) 20.(c) 21.(c) 22.(d) 23.(b) 24.(d)
25.(c) 26.(d) 27.(b) 28.(b) 29.(b) 30.(d) 31.(b) 32.(a) 33.(b) 34.(d) 35.(a) 36.(c)
37.(b) 38.(d) 39.(d) 40.(c) 41.(b) 42.(d) 43.(a) 44.(b) 45.(d) 46.(d) 47.(a) 48.(a)
49.(d) 50(d) 51.(a) 52.(c) 53.(a) 54.(c) 55.(b) 56.(b) 57.(d) 58.(c) 58.(d) 59.(b)
60.(a)

3MARKS (2 X 3 =6)
1. What are emission and absorption spectra? pg no.167,168 (M-06,O-16)
2. A 300 m long tube containing 60 c.c. of sugar solution produces a rotation of 9 when
placed in a polarimeter. It the specific rotation is 60, calculate the quantity of sugar
contained in the solution. pg no. 205 (M-06,09,J-15,M-17)
3. Why does the sky appear blue in colour? pg no.173 (J-06,O-13,J-14)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
32 MJK

4. In Young’s experiment, the width of the fringe obtained with light of wavelength
6000 Å is 2mm. calculate the fringe width if the entire apparatus is immersed in a
liquid of refractive index 1.33. pg no 203(J-06,M-11,O-14)
5. What is band emission spectrum?Give an example. pg no. 168(O-06)
6. What is Tyndall scattering? pgno.173 (M-07,J-09,10,O-10,12,J-13)
7. In Newton’s rings experiment the diameter of certain order of dark ring is measured to be
double that of second ring. What is the order of the ring? pg no 204 (M-07,J-07,O-11)
8. Define optic axis of a crystal. pg no. 199(J-07,10)
9. Distinguish between interference and diffraction fringes. pg no. 194(O-07,10,M-16)
10. A light of wavelength 5890Å falls normally on a thin air film. 6 dark fringes are seen
between two points. Calculate the thickness of the air film. pg no.209 (O-07)
11. Two slits 0.3 mm apart are illuminated by light of wavelength 4500Å. The screen is placed
at 1m distance from the slits. Find the separation between the second bright fringe
on both sides of the central maximum. page no. 204(M-08)
12. Define specific rotation. Pg no.202 (M-08,10,O-13,J-14)
13. On what factors does the amount of optical rotation depend? pg no.202 (J-08,11,M-15)
14. A light of wavelength 6000Å falls normally on a thin air film. 6 dark fringes are seen between
two points. Calculate the thickness of the air film. pg no. 209(O-06,J-08,09,J-11)
15. Write any three uses of infrared radiations. pg no.167 (O-08,M-17)
16. Write the conditions for total internal reflection to take place. pg no.179 (O-08,M-14)
17. Why is the centre of the Newton’s ring dark?

www.Padasalai.Net
pg no.187 (M-09,J-13,O-16)
18. Distinguish between Fresnel and Fraunhofer diffractions. pg no. 190,191 (M-10,J-12)
19. An LC resonant circuit contains a capacitor 400pF and an inductor 100µH .It is set into
oscillations coupled to an antenna.Calculate the wavelength of the radiated electromagnetic
wave. pg no. 209(M-13)
20. What are Franhofer lines. pg no. 169 (M-13)
21. State Huygen’s principle pg no.176 (0-9,M-12,O-15)
22. A plano – convex lens of radius 3 m is placed on an optically flat glass plate and is illuminated
by monochromatic light. The radius of the 8th dark ring is 3.6 mm. Calculate the wavelength of
light used. pg no.204 (M-15)
23. Mention any 3 characteristics of electromagnetic waves. pg no. 163 (J-15)
24. What are uniaxial and bi-axial crystals ? Give examples . pg no. 199 (O-15)
25. Give any three uses of UV rays? page no.167 ( M-14,J-16)
26. Give the conditions of sustained interference? page no.182 (O-14)
27. Give 3 uses of polaroids. page no.20 (M-16)
28. The refractive index of the medium is 3 . Calculate the angle of refraction if the unpolarised
light is incident on it at the polarizing angle of the medium. page no.209 (J-16)

7. Sun appears reddish at sunrise and sunset .why? page no.173

8. What is Raman effect? page no.173
9. How stokes and Anti stokes lines are formed? page no.173
10. What is the principle of super position of waves? page no.180
11. What are coherent and incoherent waves? page no.181
12. What is interference? page no.181
13. What is meant by constructive and destructive interference? page no.181
14. Define diffraction. page no.190
15. Define polarization. page no.196
16. What is double refraction? page no.198
17. What are polaroids? page no.200
18. What is known as optical activity? Or optical rotation? page no.201
19. Difference between ordinary ray and extraordinaryray page no.199
5 MARKS
1. A parallel beam of monochromatic light is allowed to incident normally on a plane
transmission gratting having 5000 lines per cm. A second order spectral line is found
to be diffracted at an angle 30. Calculate the wavelength of the light. (M-08,10,J-12,15)
2. State and prove Brewster law. (J-06,0-06,J-07,08,M-09,J-10,O-12,M-13,15 ,17)
3. Write a note on Nicol prism. (M-07,O-09,11)
4. Write a note on pile of plates. (M-06,J-09)

www.Padasalai.Net
5. A soap film of refractive index 1.33, is illuminated by white light incident at an angle 30
The reflected light is examined by a spectroscope in which dark band corresponding to the
wavelength 6000Å is found. Calculate the smallest thickness of the film.
14
(O-07,08,13)
(or) In Young’s experiment a light of frequency 6 x10 Hz is used. Distance between
the centres of adjacent fringes is 0.75 mm .Calculate the distance between the slits, if the screen
is 1.5 m away. (O-14,J-15)
6. A monochromatic light of wavelength 5890 Å is incident on a water surface of refractive
index 1.33. Find the velocity, frequency and wavelength of light in water. (O-07,M-11)
7. In a Newton’s rings experiment the diameter of the 20th dark ring was found to be 5.82mm
and that of the 10th ring 3.36mm. If the radius of the plano-convex lens is 1m, calculate
the wavelength of light used. (M-10,14,O-15)
8. Distinguish between interference and diffraction fringes. (O-10)
th
9. Obtain the expressions for the radius of the n dark ring in Newton’s rings experiment.
(J-11.M-12)
10. A plan convex lens of radius 3 m is placed on an optically flat glass plate and is
illuminated by monochromatic light. The radius of the 8 th dark ring is 3.6 mm.
Calculate the wavelength of light used. (M-11)
-4
11. A soap film of refaction 4/3 and thickness 1.5 x 10 cm is illuminated by light at an
angle 60° The reflected light is examined by a spectroscope in which dark band
corresponds to a wave length of 5000Å.Calculate the order of the dark band.
12. A plane transmission grating has 5000 lines/cm.Calculate the angular separation in second
order spectrum of red line 7070Å and blue line 5000Å (J-13)
or
A 300mm long tube containing 60cc of sugar solution produces a rotation of 9° when
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
34 MJK

placed in a Polarimeter.If the specific rotation is 60° ,calculate the quantity of sugar
contained in the solution
13. In Newton’s rings experiment the diameter of certain order of dark ring is measured to be
double that of second ring. What is the order of the ring? pg no 204 (J-14)
14. Mention the characteristics of electromagnetic waves.
15. Give the uses of EM spectrum.
16. Give an account of corpuscular theory and wave theory.
17. Describe Young’s double slit experiment.
18. State and explain Huygen’s principle.
19. Give the uses of polaroids. (J-16)
20. Describe Hertz experiment
21. In young’s double slit experiment two coherent sources of intensity ratio of 64: 1, produce
interference fringes. Calculate the ratio of maximum and minimum intensities. (O-14,M-16)
22. In Young’s double slit experiment, the intensity ratio of two coherent sources are 81 : 1.
Calculate the maximum and minimum intensities. (O-16 )

10 MARKS
1. Explain Raman scattering of light with the help of energy level diagram.
(M - 07, O – 07, M - 08, J – 11, M-13,O-14,15,M-16,J-16)
2. On the basis of wave theory, explain total internal reflection. Write the conditions for the

www.Padasalai.Net
3.
total internal reflection to take place. ( M - 06, J – 06, O-13,16)

What is known as interference? Derive an expression for bandwidth of interference fringes

in Young’s double slit experiment (O-6, O -11,O -10, J -7, J -10, M - 09, M -11,14,J-14,M-17)

4. What is emission and absorption spectra. Explain the different types of emission and
absorption Spectra with examples. (J - 09, M – 10, M - 12, J - 12, O -12, J-13,M-15)

5. State Huygens’s principle on the basis of wave theory. Prove the laws of reflection.(O- 08)
6. Explain theory of interference in thin transparent film due to reflected light and obtain the
condition for the intensity to be maximum and minimum. (J - 08, O - 09)
7. What are called Newton’s rings? Explain the experiment and theory of formation of the
Newton’s ring.
8. Discuss the theory of plane transmission grating.
9. State Huygen’s principle.On the basis of wave theory prove the laws of reflection. (J-15)

6. ATOMIC PHYSICS
1. The cathode rays are (Mar 11,14)
a) a stream of electrons b) a stream of positive ions
c) a stream of uncharged particles d) the same as canal rays
2. A narrow electron beam passes undeviated through an electric field E = 3 x 104 V/m and an
overlapping magnetic field B = 2 x 10-3 Wb m2. The electron motion, electric field and magnetic
field are mutually perpendicular. The speed of the electron is (Oct 12)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
35 MJK

a) 60 ms-1 b) 10.3 x 107 ms-1 c) 1.5 x 107 ms-1 d) 0.67 x 10-7 ms-1
3. According to Bohr’s postulates, which of the following quantities take discrete values?
(Mar 07,Jun 07,Oct 07,08,09,Jun 12)
a) kinetic energy b) potential energy c) angular momentum d) momentum
4. The ratio of the radii of the first three Bohr orbit is (Jun 07,Mar 08,Oct 11)
a) 1 : 1/2 : 1/3 b) 1 : 2 : 3 c) 1 : 4 : 9 d) 1 : 8 : 27
5. The first excitation potential energy or the minimum energy required to excite the atom from
ground state of hydrogen atom is, (Mar 08,Oct 10,12,13,M-14)
a) 13.6 eV b) 10.2 eV c) 3.4 eV d) 1.89 eV
6. According to Rutherford atom model, the spectral lines emitted by an atom is (Oct 11,Mar 13)
a) line spectrum b) continious spectrum
c) continuous absorption spectrum d) band spectrum
7. Energy levels A, B, C of a certain atom correspond to increasing values of energy (i.e.,)
EA < EB < Ee. If A1, A2, A3 are the wavelengths of radiations corresponding to the transitions
C to B, B to A and C to A respectively, which of the following statements is incorrect.
12
a) 3  1  2 b) 3  c) 1  2  3  0 d) 32  12  22
1  2
8. The elliptical orbits of electron in the atom were proposed by (Mar 13,O-14)
a) J.J. Thomson b) Bohr c) Sommerfeld d) de Broglie.
9. X-rays is (Mar 07,Mar 13,J-14)
a) phenomenon of conversion of kinetic energy into radiation.
b) conservation of momentum
c) conversion of energy into mass. d) principle of conservation of charge

www.Padasalai.Net
10.

11.
In an X-ray tube, the intensity of the emitted X – ray beam is increased by
a) Increasing the filament current
c) Increasing the target potential
b) decreasing the filament current
d) decreasing the target potential
The energy of a photon of characteristic X – ray from a coolidge tube comes from
(J-06,J-13)

a) the kinetic energy of the free electrons of the target b)the kinetic energy of ions of the target
c) the kinetic energy of the striking electron d)an atomic transition in the target
12. A Coolidge tube operates at 24800 V.The maximum frequency of X-radiation emitted
from Coolidge tube is (O-14)
18 18 8 8
a)6 x 10 Hz b) 3 x 10 Hz c) 6 x 10 Hz d) 3x 10 Hz
13. In hydrogen atom, which of the following transition produces spectral line of maximum wavelength?
a) 2  1 b) 4  1 c) 6  5 d) 5  2 (Oct 06)
14. In hydrogen atom, which of the following transition produces spectral line of maximum frequency?
a) 2  1 b) 6 2 c) 4  3 d) 5  2
15. After pumping process in laser, (O-13,14)
a)the number of atoms in the ground state is greater than the number of atom s in the excited state
b)the number of atoms in the excited state is greater than the number of atoms in the ground state.
c) the number of atoms in the ground state is equal to the number of atoms in the excited state.
d)No atoms are available in the excited state.
16. The chromium ions doped in the ruby rod (M-06,J-06,08,M-09,10,J-10,M-12,J-13,M-14)
a)absorbs red light b) absorbs green light c) absorbs blue light d)emit green light

ANSWERS

1(a) 2(c) 3(c) 4(c) 5(b) 6(b) 7(b) 8(c) 9(a) 10(a) 11(d) 12(a) 13(c) 14(a) 15(b) 16(b)

20. A three dimensional image of an object can be formed by (Oct 08)

a) atomic spectroscopy b) holography
c) molecular spectroscopy d) MASER
21. In a discharge tube, the source of positive rays (canal rays) is (Mar 09)
a) cathode b) anode
c) gas atoms present in the discharge tube d) fluorescent screen
22. The minimum wavelength of X-rays produced in an X-ray tube at 1000 kV is (Mar 09)
a) 0.0124 Å b) 0.124 Å c) 1.24 Å d) 0.00124 Å
23. The ionization potential of hydrogen atom is (Mar 09)
a) 13.6 eV b) -13.6 eV c) 13.6 V d) -13.6 V
24. The value of Rydberg’s constant is (June 09)
a) 1.094x10-7m1 b) 1.094x10-7m-1 c) 1.094x107m-1 d) 1.094x107m1

25. When an electric field is applied to an atom each of the spectral lines split into several
lines. This effect is known as (June 09)
a) Zeeman effect b) Stark effect c) Raman effect d) Seebeck effect
26. The direction of viscous force in Millikan’s oil drop experiment is (Oct 09)
a) always downwards b) always upwards
c) opposite to the direction of motion of the oil drop d) either upwards of downwards
27. In Sommerfeld atom model, for Principal quantum number n = 3, which of the
following sub shells represents circular orbit? (Mar 10)
a) 3s b) 3p c) 3d d) None of these
28. In Millikan’s experiment, the plates are kept at a distance of 16 mm and are maintained
at a potential difference of 10000 V. The electric intensity is (June 10)

www.Padasalai.Net
29.
a) 62.5 V/m
e
m
of cathode ray particle
5
b) 6.25 x 10 V/m 3
c) 6.25 x 10 V/m 5
d) 1.6 x 10 V/m
(June 10,Mar 13,J-13)
a) depends upon the nature of the cathode b) depends upon the nature of the anode
c) depends upon the nature of the gas atoms present inside the discharge tube
d) is independent of all these
30. The wave number of a spectral line of hydrogen atom is equal to Rydberg’s constant.
The line is (Mar 11)
a) first line of Lyman series b) series limit of Lyman series
c) first line of Pfund series d) series limit of Pfund series
31. In Millikan’s oil drop experiment, charged oil drop is balanced between the two plates.
Now the viscous force (June 11,14)
a) acts downwards b) acts upwards
c) is zero d) acts either upwards or downwards
32. If  is the frequency of characteristic X-ray line emitted by a target element of atomic
number Z, then Moseley’s law is (Oct 11)
a)   Z b)   Z c)   Z 2
d)   Z 3

33. When an electron jumps from M shell to the K shell it gives (Mar 12)
a) line b) line c) line d) line
34. Arrange the spectral lines H  , H  , H  , H  in the increasing order of their wavelength
a) H  , H  , H  , H  b) H  , H  , H  , H  (June12)
c) H  , H  , H  , H  d) H  , H  , H  , H 
35. A narrow electron beam passes undeviated through an electric field E=3 x 104 V/m
-3 2
and an overlapping magnetic field B= 2X10 Wb/m .The electron motion, electric field
and magnetic field are mutually perpendicular. The speed of the electron is (Oct 12)
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
38 MJK

a)60ms-1 b)10.3 x 107 ms-1 c)1.5 x 107 ms-1 d)0.67 x 107 ms-1
36. In hydrogen atom which of the following transitions produces a spectral line of
maximum frequency?
a) 2  1 b) 6  2 c) 4  3 d) 5  1 (Oct 12)
37. In hydrogen atom, which of the following transition produces spectral line of minimum
wavelength?
a) 2  1 b) 4  3 c) 6  5 d) 5  2 (J-13,14)
38. An electron is moving with a velocity of 3 x 106 ms-1 perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field
of induction 0.5 T.The force experienced by the electron is (M-11)
a) 2.4 x 10-13 N b) 13.6 x 10-27 N c) 13.6 x 10-11 N d) zero
39. According to Bohr’s postulates, which of the following quantities take discrete values?
a) kinetic energy b) potential energy c) angular momentum d) momentum

40. A Coolidge tube operates at 18600 V.The maximum frequency of X-radiation emitted from it
is (O- 07)
a) 4.5 x 1018 HZ b) 45 x 1018 HZ c) 4.05 x 1018 HZ d) 45.5 x 1018 HZ
41. If c is the velocity ,  the frequency and  ,the wavelength of a radiation,then its frequency is
defined as (O- 10,J-16)
a) the number of waves in a distance of one metre
b) the number of waves in a distance 
c) the number of waves in a distance c
d) the number of waves produced in a period of T second

42. In Millikan’s oil drop experiment,charged oil drop moves under the influence of electric field.Now

www.Padasalai.Net
43.
the viscous force :
a) is zero b) acts downwards c) acts upwards d) acts first upwards and then downwards
(O-13)

In Thomson’s experiment,cathode rays moving with a velocity ‘v’ enter perpendicular to an electric
field of intensity ‘E’ .The deflection produced by the cathode rays is directly proportional to : (J-14)
a) v b) v-1 c) v2 d) v-2
44. The direction of the electric field in Millikan’s oil drop experiment acts : (M-15)
a) downwards b) upwards
c) first upwards then downwards d) first downwards then upwards
45. The longest wavelength that can be analyzed by a rock crystal of spacing d= 2.82 Å in the first
order is (O-15)
a) 2.82Å b)5.64Å c)11.28Å d) 21.76Å

46. A beam of cathode rays moves from left to right in a plane of the paper and it enters into a
uniform magnetic field acting perpendicular to the plane of the paper and inwards.Now,the
cathode rays are deflected (M-16)
a) downwards b) upwards
c) in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper and inwards
d) in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper and outwards
47. The colour of light emitted by ruby laser (J-16)
a) Green light b) red light c) yellow light d) violet light

ANSWERS

1.(a) 2.(a) 3.(b) 4.(c) 5.(b) 6.(b) 7.(a) 8.(d) 9.(d) 10.(c) 11.(a)
12.(c) 13.(a) 14.(d) 15.(d) 16.(b) 17.(b) 18.(b) 19.(b) 20.(b) 21.(c) 22.(a)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
39 MJK

23.(c) 24.(c) 25.(b) 26.(c) 27.(c) 28.(b) 29.(d) 30.(b) 31.(c) 32.(c) 33.(b)
34.(b) 35.(c) 36.(d) 37.(a) 38.(a) 39.(c) 40.(a) 41.(d) 42.(b) 43.(d) 44.(a)
45.(b) 46.(a) 47.(b)

3 MARKS (2 X 3 = 6)
1. How much should be the voltage of an X-ray tube so that the electrons emitted from
the cathode may give an X-ray of wavelength 1Å after striking the target? 50 (J-07,M-13)
2. Calculate the longest wavelength that can be analysed by a rock salt crystal of spacing
d= 2.82 Å in the first order. pg no. 44 (J-06,O-08,M-09,J-10,O-10,M-11,J-12,16)
3. Write the conditions to achieve laser action. pg no. 36(M-06,J-07,O-13,J-14,16)
4 An X-ray diffraction of a crystal gave the first line at a glancing angle of 6 27’. If the
wavelength of x-ray is 0.58 Å, find the distance between the two cleavage planes.
Pg no.50(M-06,O-13,14,15)
5. What are the characteristics of Laser? pg no.35 (O-06,J-09,M-10,J-10,12,O-12)
6. Rydberg constant for hydrogen atom is 1.097x107 m-1 . Calculate the shortest wavelength
of the spectral line of its Lyman series. pg no. 43(O-06,09,M-15,17)
7. State Moseley’s law. Write its equation pg no.33 (M-07,08,09,11,J-14,M-16)
8. Write the principle of Millikan’s oil drop experiment. pg no. 5(J-06,M-12,J-15)
9. What are the drawbacks of sommerfeld atom model? pg no. 24,25(O-11)

www.Padasalai.Net
10.
11.
12.
13.
Write the applications of Mosley’s law.
What is hologram?
Write any three medical applications of laser.
Write any three applications of laser in industry.
pg no. 33(O-12,J-13,O-14,J-15)
pg no.46 (O-07)
pg no. 39(M-08,O-09,J-11,O-11,16,M-17)
pg no.39 (J-08)
14. Explain any one of the drawbacks of Rutherford atom model. pg no. 12(O-08)
15. Define ionization potential energy. pg no. 20,21 (M-07,J-09,O-10)
16. Find the minimum wavelength of X-rays produced by an X-ray tube operating at 1000kV.
(M-10,J-13)
7 -1
17. A beam of electron moving with a uniform speed of 4 x 10 ms is projected normal to the
uniform magnetic field where B= 10-3 Wb/m2 .What is the path of the beam in magnetic field ?
pg no.41 (M-12)
18. Write down the two important facts of the Laue experiment on X-ray diffraction.
pg no. 29(O-07,J-08,M-13)
19. An electron beam passes through a transverse magnetic field of 2 x 10-3 tesla and electric field
E of 3.4 x 104 V/m acting simultaneously.If the path of the electrons remain
undeviated,calculate the speed of the electrons. page no.54( M-14 )
20. Distinguish between soft X rays and hard X rays. pg no.26(M-14 )
21. What is ionization potential of atom ? pg no. 20,21 (M-15)
22. Write 3 properties of cathode rays Pg.no 2(O-15)
23. In Millikan’s experiment,an oil drop of mass 4.9 x 10-14 kg is balanced by applying a potential
differernce of 9.8 kV between the two plates which are 12.8mm apart.Calculate the number of
elementary charges on the drop. (M-16)
24. A Coolidge tube operates at 24,800 V. what is the maximum frequency of X radiation
Emitted from coolidge tube ? (O-16)
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
40 MJK

13. What are the drawbacks of Rutherford atom model.

14. Give the short comings of Bohr’s theory.
15. Obtain the expression for the radius of the nth orbit of an electron based on Bohr’s theory.
(J-13)
16. Write any five properties of canal rays. (M-14,16)
17. Give the applications of X –rays.
18. Give the applications of LASER
19. What are the draw backs of sommerfeld model.

10 MARKS
1. State Bohr’s postulates. Obtain an expression for the radius of nth orbit of hydrogen atom
based on the Bohr’s Theory. (M - 06 , M - 08, J - 09, M -12,M-14,O-15)
2. Describe the J.J Thomson method for determine the specific charge of an electron.
(O - 09, M - 10, J - 10, O - 10, O – 11, J – 12,O-13,14,M-16,J-16,O-16)

3. Explain the working ruby laser with the help of energy level diagram.
(O - 06, J - 07, M - 09, J -11,O -12,M-13,15,17)
4. How will you determine the wavelength of x-rays using Bragg’s spectrometer.
Write any five properties of x-rays. (M - 07)
5. Derive Bragg’s law. Explain how a Bragg’s spectrometer can be used to determine the
wavelength of x-rays. (J – 07,14)

www.Padasalai.Net
6.

7.
Draw a neat diagram of the He-Ne laser and explain its working with the help of
energy level diagram. (J - 06, M – 11, J-13,15)
Describe Millikan’s oil drop experiment to determine the charge of an electron.
(J - 08, O - 08)
8. Explain Sommerfeld atom model.

7. DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER AND RELATIVITY

1. A photon of frequency is incident on a metal surface of threshold frequency 0. The kinetic
energy of the emitted photoelectron is
a) h ( - 0) b) h c) h0 d) h ( + 0)
2. The work function of a photoelectric material is 3.3 eV. The threshold frequency will be equal
to (M - 08, J-11,J-13,O-13)
a) 8 x 1014 Hz b) 8 x 1010 Hz c) 5 x 1020 Hz d) 4 x 1014 Hz
3. The stopping potential of a metal surface is independent of
a) frequency of incident radiation b) intensity of incident radiation
c) the nature of metal surface d) velocity of electrons emitted.
4. At the threshold frequency, the velocity of the electron is (M-14)
a) zero b) maximum c) minimum d) infinite
5. The photoelectric effect can be explained on the basis of (O-14)
a) corpuscular theory of light b) wave theory of light
c) electromagnetic theory of light d) quantum theory of light
6. The wavelength of the matter wave is independent of (J-13)
a) mass b) momentum c) velocity d) charge
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
42 MJK

7. If the kinetic energy of the moving particle is E, then the De Bogie wavelength is (M-14)
h 2mE h
a)   b)   c)   h 2mE d)  
2mE h E 2m

8. The momentum of the electron having wavelength 2 Å is

a) 3.3 x 1024 kg ms-1 b) 6.6 x 1024 kg ms-1 c) 3.3 x 10-24 kg ms-1 d) 6.6 x 10-24 kg ms-1

9. According to relativity, the length of a rod in motion (J - 06, 07, 08, 10,O-13,14)
a) is same as its rest length b) is more than its rest length
c) is less than its rest length
d) may be more or less than or equal to rest length depending on the speed of the rod.
10. If 1kg of a substance is fully converted into energy, then the energy produced is (J-14)
16 24 8
a) 9 x 10 J b) 9 x 10 J c) 1J d) 3 x 10 J

ANSWERS

1.(a) 2.(a) 3.(b) 4.(a) 5.(d) 6.(d) 7.(a) 8.(c) 9.(c) 10.(a)

6. The ionization power is maximum for ( J- 10, O- 10, 11,O-13)

a) neutrons b)  - particles c)  - rays d)  - particles
7. The half life period of a certain radioactive element with disintegration constant 0.0693 per
day is
a) 10 days b) 14 days c) 140 days d) 1.4 days
8. The radio-isotope used in agriculture is (O-14)
31 32 23 24
a) 15P b) 15P c) 11Na d) 11Na

9. The average energy released per fission is (J-13,M-15)

a) 200 eV b) 200 MeV c) 200 meV d) 200 GeV
10. The explosion of atom bomb is based on the principle of (M- 13)
a) uncontrolled fission reaction b) controlled fission reaction
c) fusion reaction d) thernonuclear reaction
11. Anaemia can be diagnosed by (J-14)
a) 15P31 b) 15P32 c) 26Fe59 d) 11Na24

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
46 MJK

12. In the nuclear reaction 80Hg198 + X  79Au198 + 1H1, X-stands for

a) proton b) electron c) neutron d) deuteron
13. In -decay
a) atomic number decreases by one b) mass number decreases by one
c) proton number remains the same d) neutron number decreases by one
14. Isotopes have (O- 10,13)
a) same mass number but different atomic number
b) same proton number and neutron number
c) same proton number but different neutron number
d) same neutron number but different proton number
15. The time taken by the radioactive element to reduce to 1/e times is (J-13,M-14)
a) half life b) mean life c) half life / 2 d) twice the mean life
16. The half life period of N 13 is 10.1 minute. Its life time is (M-13,J-14)
10.1
a) 5.05 minutes b) 20.2 minutes c) minutes d) infinity
0.6931
17. Positive rays of the same element produce two different traces in a Bainbridge mass
spectrometer. The positive ions have
a) same mass with different velocity b) same mass with same velocity
c) different mass with same velocity d) different mass with different velocity

18. The binding energy of 26Fe56 nucleus is

a) 8.8 MeV b) 88 MeV c) 493 MeV d) 41.3 MeV
19. The ratio of nuclear density to the density of mercury is about
a) 1.3 x 1010 b) 1.3 c) 1.3 x 1013 d) 1.3 x 104

www.Padasalai.Net
ANSWERS

1.(b) 2.(c) 3.(c) 4.(b) 5.(c) 6.(b) 7.(a) 8.(b) 9.(b) 10.(a) 11.(c)
12.(c) 13.(d) 14.(c) 15.(b) 16.(d) 17.(c) 18.(c) 19.(c)

12. The fuel used in Kamini reactor is (O- 07,O-14)

a) 92U238 b) 92U233 c) 92Pu239 d) low enriched uranium
13. The half-life period of a certain radioactive element with disintegration constant 0.0693 per day
is (O- 07,J- 12,O-12)
a) 10 days b) 14 days c) 140 days d) 1.4 days
14. The mean life () and half-life (T1/2) of a radioactive element are related as (Mar 08)
T T
a)  = 2T 1/2 b)  = 1 / 2 c)  = 0.6931 T1/2 d)  = 1 / 2
0.6931 2
A
15. A radioactive element ZX after emitting three -particles and four -particles is converted into
an element Y represented as (Mar 08)
A–12 A–12 A–12 A–12
a) Z–6 Y b) Z+2 Y c) Z–2 Y d) Z–10 Y

www.Padasalai.Net
16.

17.

18.
Which of the following is used to detect the presence of block in blood vessels? (Mar 08,14)
a) 15P31

a) 2
b) 15P32

b) 4
Slow neutrons having energies between
c) 26Fe59
If the nuclear radius is 2.6 x 10-15 m, the mass number will be
c) 8
d) 11Na24

d) 16
(June 08)

(June 08)
a) 1000 eV to 2000 eV b) 2000 eV to 0.5 eV
c) 0 eV to 1000 eV d) 0.5 ev to 10 mev
19. Particle that has no charge and no rest mass but travels with velocity of light is (Oct 08)
a) baryon b) meson c) lepton d) photon
20. The half-life of a radioactive element is 300 days. The disintegration constant of the
radioactive element is (Mar 09)
a) 0.00231 day b) 0.00231 / day c) 0.0231 / day d) 0.0231 day

21. The explosion of atom bomb is based on the principle of (Mar 10)
a) uncontrolled fission reaction b) controlled fission reaction
c) fusion reaction d) thermonuclear reaction
22. The mean life of radon is 5.5 days. Its half-life is
a) 8 days b) 2.8 days c) 0.38 days d) 3.8 days.
23. The energy equivalent to 1amu is (June 09,M-14,O-14)
a) 931 MeV b) 931 meV c) 931 eV d) 913 MeV
24. The nuclear force existing between any two nucleons is due to the continuous
exchange of particles called (Oct 09)
a) leptons b) mesons c) hyperons d) photons.

25. In the nuclear reaction 4Be9 + X  6C12 + 0n1, X stands for (Mar 10)
a) Proton b)  -particles (Alpha particle) c) Electron d) Deuteron
26. Which of the following belongs to Baryon group? (Mar 10)
a) Photon b) Electron c) Pion d) Proton
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
48 MJK

27. The ionization power is maximum for (June 10,15)

a) neutrons b)  -particles c)  - rays d)  - particles
- t
28. According to the law disintegration N = N0 e , the number of radioactive atoms that
have been decayed during a time of t is (June 10)
N
a) N0 b) N c) N0 – N d) 0
2
29. The coolant used in fast breeder reactor is (Oct 09,13,15)
a) ordinary water b) heavy water
c) liquid sodium d) boron carbide
30. Which of the following are isotones? (Oct 09)
235 238 16 14 14 14 14 13
a) 92U and 92U b) 8O and 7U c) 6C and 7N d) 7N and 6C
31. Arrange  ,  and  rays in the increasing order of their ionizing power (Mar 11)
a)    b)    c)    d)   
32. When mass number increases, nuclear density (June 11)
a) increases b) decreases c) remains constant d) may increase (or) decrease
33. The nuclear force between a proton and another proton inside the nucleus is (Oct 11)
a) zero b) short range c) repulsive d) long range
34. The cosmic ray intensity is maximum at a latitude of (Oct 11)
a) 00 b) 450 c) 900 d) 600
35. Hydrogen bomb is based on the principle of (Oct 11)
a) nuclear fission b) nuclear fusion
c) nuclear force d) carbon nitrogen cycle
36. The unit of disintegration constant is (Mar 12)

www.Padasalai.Net
-1
a) no unit b) second c) second d) curie
37. The explosion of hydrogen bomb is based on the principle of (Mar 12)
a) un controlled fission reaction b) nuclear fusion reaction
c) controlled fission reaction d) photo electric effect
38. Positive rays of the same element produce two different in Bainbridge mass
spectrometer. The positive ions have (Mar 12,O-14)
a) same mass with different velocities b) same mass with same velocity
c) different masses with same velocity d) different masses with different velocity
39. The mass defect of certain nucleus is 0.03 amu. Then its binding energy is (June 12)
a) 27.93 eV b) 27.93 KeV c) 27.93 GeV d) 27.93 MeV
40. The nucleons in a nucleus attracted by (June 12)
a) gravitational force b) electrostatic force
c) nuclear force d) magnetic force

41. Which of the following is massless and changeless but carrier of energy and spin (June 12)
a) Neutrino b) muon c) Pion d) Kaon
42. The radius of a nucleus is 5.2F.The number of nucleons in the nucleus is (Oct 12)
a)52 b)104 c)64 d)128
43. In proton-proton cycle four protons fuse together to give (Oct 12)
a)an paticle,two electrons,two neutrinos and energy of 26.7Mev
b)an paticle,two positrons,two neutrinos and energy of 26.7Mev
c) a helium atom,two positrons,two neutrinos and energy of 26.7ev
d) an paticle,two positrons,two antineutrinos and energy of 26.7Mev
44. 1 Curie is (Mar 13)
a)activity of 1g of uranium b)1 disintegration/second
10 12
c)3.7 x 10 becquerel d)1.6 x 10 disintegration /second

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
49 MJK

45. The radioisotope used in the treatment of skin disease is (J-13,15)

a)Na24 b)I131 c)Fe59 d)p32
46. The mean life and half life 𝑇 of a radioactive element are related as (O-14)
.
a) =2𝑇 b) 𝑇 = c) 𝑇 = 0.6931  d) = 6931/2
47. The nature of the electrostatic force and nuclear force between a proton and a neutron inside a
nucleus are respectively (M-15)
a) repulsive and attractive b) zero and attractive
c) repulsive and repulsive d) attractive and attractive
48. The unit of disintegration constant is (O-15)
-1
a) no unit b) second c) second d) curie

49. The half life period of N 13 is 10.1 minute. Its mean life is (M-16)
10.1
a) 5.05 minutes b) 20.2 minutes c) minutes d) infinity
0.6931
50. The radius of the nucleus which contains 64 nucleons is (J-16)
a) 2.6 F b) 5.2 F c) 10.4F d) 7.8 F
51. The decay constant of free neutron is (O-16)
a) 0.013 minute -1 b) 0.053 minute -1 c) 3 minutes d) 0.069 minute -1
52. Arrange electron (e),proton(p), and deuteron(d) in the increasing order of their specific charge:
a) e,p,d b) d,p,e c) p,e,d d) d,e,p (M-17)
53. In a Bainbridge mass spectrometer positive rays of the same element produce different
traces.The traces correspond to (M-17)

www.Padasalai.Net
ANSWERS
a) isotopes b) isobars c) isotones d) none

1.(b) 2.(b) 3.(a) 4.(c) 5.(d) 6.(b) 7.(c) 8.(c) 9.(c) 10.(a) 11.(a) 12.(b)
13.(a) 14.(b) 15.(c) 16.(d) 17.(c) 18.(c) 19.(d) 20.(b) 21.(a) 22.(d) 23.(a) 24.(b)
25.(b) 26.(d) 27.(b) 28.(c) 29.(c) 30.(d) 31.(c) 32.(c) 33.(b) 34.(c) 35.(b) 36.(c)
37.(b) 38.(c) 39.(d) 40.(c) 41.(a) 42.(c) 43.(b) 44.(c) 45.(d) 46.(b) 47.(b) 48.(c)
49.(c) 50.(b) 51.(b) 52.(b) 53.(a)

3 MARKS ( 2 X 3 =6 )
1. What is pair production and annihilation of matter? pg no.107(M-06,J-06,M-07,14)
2. Write any three properties of neutron. pg no.89(J-06,M-08,J-11,O-11,M-14,17)
3. What is - decay? Give example. pg no.85 (M-06,M-13)
4. Write any three conclusions obtained from Binding energy curve. pg no.80( O-06,M-07)
5. Define Curie. pg no. 88(O-06,M-08,10,O-10,J-13,O-13,M-15,17)
6. The half-life of radon is 3.8 days. Calculate its mean life. pg no. 120(O-09,J-10)
7. Define roentgen. pg no.92(J-07,08)
8. Write a note on Leptons. pg no.107 (J-07,M-12,O-15)
218
9. The half-life of 84Po is 3 minutes. What percentage of the sample has decayed in 15 minutes?
pg no. 119(O-07,J-13)
10. What is the use of control rod in the reactor? Mention any two control rods. pg no.100(O-07)
11. What are cosmic rays? pg no.105 (J-08,10,O-14)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
50 MJK

12. Write any three properties of nuclear force. pg no. 82(J-08,M-09)

13. Define critical size and critical mass. pg no. 97(O-08,15)
14. What is meant by breeder reactor? pg no.101 (M-09,J-15)
214
15. The radioactive isotope 84Po undergoes a successive disintegration of two  decays and
two  decays. Find the atomic number and mass number of the resulting isotope.120(J-9,15 ,O-14)
16. How do you classify neutrons in terms of its kinetic energy? pg no.89 (J-09)
17. Tritium has a half-life of 12.5 years. What fraction of the sample will be left over after 25
years? pg no. 119 (M-10,J-12,O-12)
18. What is Binding energy of nucleus? pg no. 79(O-09)
19. What is mass defect? pg no. 79 (O-10,16)
20. Write the proton –proton cycle that takes place in sun and stars. pg no. 104(M-11)
21. What do you mean by artificial radio activity? pg no. 90(J-12,O-12)
22. What percentage of a given radioactive substance will be left after 5 half-life periods? (M-11)
23. Calculate the number of atoms in one gram of 3Li6 (O-11)
24. Select the pairs of isotopes,isobars and isotones from the following nuclei:
22 24 24 23
11Na ,12Mg ,11Na ,10Ne (M-12)
25. What are the uses of nuclear reactors? pg no. 101 (J-11,M-13,16)
26. State radioactive law of disintegration pg no. 86 (O-13,J-16)
238
27. The radioactive isotope 92U undergoes a successive disintegration of three  decays and
two  decays. Find the atomic number and mass number of the resulting isotope. (J-14)
28. Explain the method of producing artificial isotopes

www.Padasalai.Net
pg no.90 (J-14)
29. What are the precautions to be taken by the people who are working in radiation laboratories ? 93 (M-15)
30. Write a note on decay. Give example age no.85 (M-16)
31. Write any 3 properties of rays page no.84 (J-16)
32. Write 3 properties of rays page no.84 (O-16)
OTHER IMPORTANT QUESTIONS
1. Differentiate between atom bomb and hydrogen bomb pg no.97,103
2. What are isotopes,isobars,isotones? Pg no.76,77
3. Define atomic mass unit? page no.78
4. Calculate the energy equivalence of 1 atomic mass unit. page no.78
5. What is the principle of Bainbridge spectrometer? page no.80
6. What are nuclear forces? page no.82
7. Define radioactivity. page no.83
8. Write a note on decay.Give example page no.85
9. State the radioactive law of disintegration. page no.86
10. Define Half life period. page no.87
11. Define mean life period. page no.88
12. What is meant by artificial transmutations? page no.93
13. Write the uses of radio isotopes in medical field. page no.91
14. What is radio carbon dating? page no.92
15. Distinguish between natural and artificial radio activity.
16. What is particle accelerator? page no.93
17. What are synchronous accelerators? page no.94
18. Define nuclear fission? Give example. page no.95
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
51 MJK

19. What is chain reaction? page no.96

20. What is a nuclear reactor? page no.98
21. What is a Hydrogen bomb?.Give the fusion reaction. page .103
22. What are photons,mesons,Baryons? pg no .107

5 MARKS
1. Show that the mass of radium (88Ra226) with an activity of 1 curie is almost a gram.
(Give T1/2 =1600 yrs. Curie=3.7x1010 disintegrations per second) (O-06,08,M-12)
[or]
Calculate the mass of coal required to produce the same energy as that produced by the
fission of 1 kg of U235. [Given: Heat of combustion of coal = 33.6 x 106 Jkg-1. Energy per
fission of U235 = 200 Mev. leV = 1.6 x 10 -19 J. Avogadro number N = 6.023 x 10 23].
(J-08)
2. A piece of bone from an archaeological site is found to give a count rate of 15 counts
per minute.A similar sample of fresh bone gives a count rate of 19 counts per minute.
Calculate the age of specimen.( Given T1/2 = 5570 years) (M-06,O-11,M-14,J-16)
[or]
Calculate the energy released when 1kg of 92U235 undergoes nuclear fission. Assume,
energy per fission is 200 MeV. Avogadro Number = 6.023x1023 . Express your answer in
kilowatt hour also. (M-06,O-13)
2 4
3. Find the energy released when two 1H nuclei fuse together to form single 2He nucleus.

www.Padasalai.Net
Give the binding energies per nucleon of 1H2 and 2He4 are 1.1 MeV. and 7.0 Mev
respectively. [or] (J-06,O-12)
A reactor is developing energy at the rate of 32 MW . Calculate the required number
of fissions per second of 92U235. Assume that energy per fission is 200 MeV.
(J-06,08,O-09,J-11,M-14,17)
4. Explain how a cosmic ray shower is formed. (M-07,J-12)
5. If the mass defect of the nucleus 6C12 is 0.098 amu, then calculate the binding energy
per nucleon. (J-07)
6. Explain the latitude effect of cosmic rays. (J-07,O-07,J-09)
7. Calculate the time required for 60% of a sample of radon to undergo decay.
Atomic number of  particle =2. (Given T1/2 of radon =3.8 days) (M-08,M-13)
8. Write a note on the biological hazards of nuclear radiations. (O-08)
12 13
9. The binding energy per nucleon for 6C nucleus is 7.68 MeV and that for 6C is 7.47 MeV.
Calculate the energy required to remove a neutron from 6C13 nucleus. (M-07,15)
10. The disintegration constant  of a radioactive element is 0.00231 per day. Calculate its
half-life and mean life. (M-10)
11. Give an explanation for the binding energy curve. (Graph not necessary) (J-10,O-16)
12. Write the properties of rays. (O-10,J-15,O-15)
13. Calculate the energy released in the following equation:
6 1 4 3
3Li + 0n → 2He + 1H (O-11,M-16)
14. Explain soddy-Fajan’s radioactive displacement laws. (M-11)
15. Calculate the energy released in the following equation:
27 2 25 4
13Al + 1H → 12Mg + 2He (O-12)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
52 MJK

14
16. A carbon specimen found in a cave contained a fraction of 1/8 th of C to that present in a
Living system.Calculate the approximate age of the specimen.Given T1/2 for 6C12=5560 years (O-13)
17. Explain artificial radioactivity.
18. Explain chain reaction.
19. Write the properties of neutrons. (J-13)
20. Write the principle and working of on atom bomb. (J-14)
21. Explain how carbon-nitrogen cycle can account for the Production of stellar energy. (O-14)
22. Calculate the binding energy and binding energy per nucleon of 20Ca40 nucleus. Given, mass of
1 proton = 1.007825 amu ; mass of 1 neutron = 1.008665 amu; mass of
40
20Ca nucleus = 39.96259 amu (J-16)

10 MARKS
1. Describe the principle and action of a Bainbridge Mass spectrometer in determining
the isotopic masses.Mention its use
(J - 6, J - 7, J - 8, O - 6, M - 9, J - 10, O -10, J -11, O -12,0-13,M-14,16)
2. Explain the construction and working of a Geiger Muller counter.
(M - 07, O - 07, J - 09, M -11,M-13,J-14,O-15,M-17)
3. What are cosmic rays? Explain the latitude effect and altitude effect regarding
cosmic rays (M – 08,M – 10, J-13,M-15)
4. Obtain an expression for the amount of the radioactive substance present at any moment.
Obtain the relation between half life period and decay constant.
(O - 08, O – 09, O -11, M – 12, J – 12,15)

www.Padasalai.Net
5. What is the nuclear reactor? Explain the function of (i) moderator (ii) control rod
(iii) neutron reflector. Mention the uses of nuclear reactor.(diagram not necessary)
(M-06J-16,O-16)
6. Describe the discovery of neutrons. Mention the properties of neutrons (O-14)

9. SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND THEIR APPLICATIONS

1. The electrons in the atom of an element which determine its chemical and electrical
properties are called
a) valance electrons b) revolving electron c) excess electrons d) active electrons
2. In an N-type semiconductor, there are
a) immobile negative ions b) no minority carriers
c) immobile positive ions d) holes as majority carriers
3. The reverse saturation Current in PN junction diode is only due to (J-14)
a) majority carriers b) minority carriers c) acceptor ions d) donar ions
4. In the forward bias characteristic curve, a diode appears as (J-13)
a) a high resistance b) a capacitor c) an OFF switch d) an ON switch
5. Avalanche break down is primarily dependent on the phenomenon of (O-14)
a) collision b) ionization c) doping d) recombination.
6. The colour of light emitted by a LED depends on (M-14)
a) its reverse bias b) the amount of forward current
c) its forward bias d) type of semiconductor material

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
53 MJK

7. The emitter base junction of a given transistor is forward biased and its collector-base
junction is reverse biased. If the base current is increased, then its
a) VCE will increase b) IC will decrease
c) IC will increase d) VCC will increase
8. Improper biasing of a transistor circuit produces (O-13)
a) heavy loading of emitter current b) distortion in the output signal
c) excessive heat at collector terminal d) faulty location of load line
9. An Oscillator is
a) an amplifier with feedback b) a converter of AC to DC energy
c) nothing but an amplifier d) an amplifier without feedback.
10. In a Colpitt’s oscillator circuit
a) capacitive feedback is used b) tapped coil is used
c) no tuned LC circuit is used d) no capacitor is used
11. since the input Impedance of an ideal operational amplifier is infinite.
a) its input current in zero b) its output resistance is high
c) its output voltage becomes independent of load resistance
d) it becomes a current controlled device
12. The following arrangement performs the logic function of (J-13)

A
B Y

a) AND gate b) OR gate c) NAND gate d) EXOR gate

13. If the output Y of the following circuit is 1, then the inputs A, B and C must be (M- 13,J-14)

www.Padasalai.Net A

C
Y

a) 0, 1, 0 b) 1, 0, 0 c) 1, 0, 1 d) 1, 1, 0

14. According to the laws of Boolean algebra, the expression (A + AB) is equal to
a) A b) AB c) B d) A

15. The Boolean expression ABC can be simplified as (O-14)

a) AB  C b) A..B. C. c)AB+ BC+CA d) A  B  C.
ANSWERS

1.(a) 2.(c) 3.(b) 4.(d) 5.(a) 6.(d) 7.(c) 8.(b) 9.(a)

10.(a) 11.(a) 12.(a) 13.(c) 14.(a) 15.(d)

2. Condition for oscillator is (Mar 06)

a) A = 0 b) A = 1/ c) A =  d) A +  = 0

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
54 MJK

3. The potential barrier of silicon PN junction diode is approximately (June 06)

a) 0.3V b) 0.7V c) 1.1V d) 10V
4. The Boolean expression to represent NAND operation is (June 06)
a) Y = A + B b) Y = A . B c) Y = A d) y = A.B

5. Find the voltage across resistor as shown in the figure (silicon diode is used) (M- 07,14)
2.7V

D
180
a) 2.4V b) 2.0V c) 1.8V d) 0.7V

6. Barkhausen condition for maintenance of oscillation is (Mar 07)

1 1
a)   b) A   c) A =  d) A 
A 2
7. In CE single stage amplifier, the voltage gain at mid frequency is 10. The voltage gain at upper
cut-off frequency is (Oct 06, J-13)
a) 10 b) 14.14 c) 7.07 d) 20
8. The output (Y) of the logic circuit given below is (Mar 07)
A Y
B

a) A + B b) A . B c) A  B d) A  B

www.Padasalai.Net
9. The output of the given operational amplifier is

100 K 
(June 07)

10k
-
V out
V in = 0.2 sin t
+

a) – 2 sin t b) 2 sin t c) – 2 sin (t + 10) d) 2 sin (t + 10)

10. The symbol to represent LED is (June 07)

a) b)  c) d)

11. The logic gate for which there is ‘Low’ output only when both the inputs are ‘High’ is (June 07)
a) AND b) NAND c) NOR d) EXOR
12. The output voltage of the operational amplifier (Op-Amp) given below is (Oct 07)

R R
+2 V

-3 V R V out

a) – 1 V b) 1 V c) +5 V d) –5 V

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
55 MJK

13. In a junction transistor the emitter region is heavily doped since emitter has to supply to the base
a) minority carriers b) majority carriers c) acceptor ions d) donor ions (Oct 07)
14. A logic gate which has an output ‘1’, when the inputs are complement to each other is (O-7,M-15)
a) AND b) NAND c) NOR d) EXOR
15. The forbidden energy gap of silicon is of the order of (Mar 08)
a) 0.1 eV b) 0.3 eV c) 0.7 eV d) 1.1 eV
16. Of the following, the donor atoms are (Mar 08)
a) Silicon and germanium b) Aluminium and gallium
c) Bismuth and antimony d) Boron and indium
17. In common emitter (CE) amplifier, the phase reversal between input and output voltage is
a) 0 b) 90 c) 270 d) 180 (June 08)
18. In common emitter transistor circuit, the base current (Ib) of the transistor is 50A and the
collector current (Ic) is 25 mA. Then the current gain is (Oct 08)
a) 50 b) 500 c) 20 d) 200
19. An example for non-sinusoidal oscillator is (Mar 09)
a) Multivibrator b) RC oscillator c) Colpit oscillator d) Crystal oscillator
20. In the pin configuration of IC 741, pin 3 represents (Mar 10,O-14)
a) inverting input b) non-inverting input c) Vcc d) output.

21. The forbidden energy gap for conductors is (Mar 10)

a) 0.7 eV b) 1.1 eV c) zero d) 3 eV
1 1
22. In a transistor, the value of    is equal to (Mar 11)
  

www.Padasalai.Net
23.
a) 

a) NAND
b) 

b) NOR
c)


d) 1
A logic gate for which there is an output only when both the inputs are zero is (June 11,0-16)
c) EXOR d) AND
24. In the forward bias characteristics curve,a diode appears as (Jun 11,Oct 12 )
a) a high resistance b)a capacitor c)an OFF switch d)an ON switch
25. The phase reversal between the input and output voltage is single stage CE amplifier is (Oct 12)
 3
a) b) 2  c)  d)
2 2

26. In a PN Junction diode on the side of N but very close to the Junction there are (Jun 12)
a) donor atoms b) acceptor atoms
c) immovable positive ions d) immovable negative ions
27. In N type semiconductor donor level lies (Oct 12)
a)just below the conduction band b)just above the conduction band
c)just below the valence band d)just above the valence band
28. For a transistor connected in common emmiter mode (CE)the slope of the input characteristic
curve gives: (Mar 13)
a)input impedance b)current gain c)reciprocal of input impedance d)voltage gain

29. The Boolean expression to represent EX-OR operation is y =

a) A B  A B b) A . B c) A  B d) A . B

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
56 MJK

30. The following arangement performs the logic function (M- 12)
A

a) AND b) OR c) NAND d) EX – OR
31. In CE single stage amplifier if the voltage gain at mid-frequency is AM,then the voltage gain at
lower cut off frequency is : (O-13,J-15)
√
a) b) √ AM c) d)
√
32. The following arangement performs the logic function of (O-13)

A
Y
B

a) NOT b) EX – OR c) OR d) AND

www.Padasalai.Net
33.

34.
According to the laws of Boolean algebra, the expression (A+AB) is equal to :
a) A b) AB c) B d) A
The forbidden energy gap for germanium and silicon is of the order of
(J-14)

(J-14)

a) 1.1 eV and 0.7 eV b) 0.7 eVand 1.1 eV c) 4 eV and 0.7eV d) 1.1 eV and 7 eV
35. The potential barrier of germanium PN junction diode is approximately (O-15)
a) 0.7V b) 0.5V c) 0.3V d) 0.2V
36. A( ̅ + B) = ? (M-16)
a) A b) B c) AB d) A+B
37. The voltage at B in the figure is (Germanium diode is used) (M-16)

+6V
B
2k
a) 5.3V b) 5.7V c) 6.3V d) 6V
38. In a multimeter, when the current scale shows full scale deflection,the ohmmeter scale reads
a)Maximum but not infinity b) infinity c) zero d) minimum but not zero (J-16)

ANSWERS

1.(b) 2.(b) 3.(b) 4.(d) 5.(b) 6.(a) 7.(c) 8.(a) 9.(a) 10.(c) 11.(b)
12.(b) 13.(b) 14.(d) 15.(d) 16.(c) 17.(d) 18.(b) 19.(a) 20.(b) 21.(c) 22.(d)
23.(b) 24.(d) 25.(c) 26.(c) 27.(a) 28.(c) 29.(a) 30.(b) 31.(d) 32.(c) 33.(a)
34.(b) 35.(c) 36.(c) 37.(b) 37.(c) 38.(c)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
57 MJK

3 MARKS (4 X 3 =12)
1. Draw summing amplifier circuit using operational amplifier pg.167 (M-09, M-13,J-13,M-17)
2. When the negative feedback is applied to an amplifier of gain 50, the gain falls to 25,
Calculate the feedback ratio. pg no.173 (J-06,O-09,M-10,O-10,J-14,M-16)
3. Draw the circuit diagram for OR gate using diodes. pg no.157 (J-06)
4. What is an extrinsic semiconductor? pg no.126(J-06,08,O-10,M-11,O-13,J-14)
5. What is an intrinsic semiconductor? Give two examples. pg no.125 (M-06,O-15,M-17)
6. The gain of a amplifier without feedback is 100 and gain with positive feedback is 200
calculate the feedback fraction. (M-06)
7. What is a light emitting diode? Give any one of its uses pg no.136,137(M-07,J-15,O-15)
8. Define bandwith of an amplifier pg no.147(M-07,O-11,J-12,O-12,16)
9. When there is no feedback the gain of the amplifier is 100. if 5% of the output voltage is fed
back into the input through a negative feedback network, find out the voltage gain after
feedback. pg no.178 (M-07)
10. What are the advantages of negative feedback? pg 150 (J-7,O-7,J-8,M-11,12,M-13,J-15,16)
11. Find the output of the given circuit. pg no.179 (J-09,16)
5k

10k

www.Padasalai.Net
V1

V2 10k
+
Vo

12. Draw the circuit diagram of AND gate using diodes and resistor. pg no.158 (J-07,M-15)
13. Give the Barkhausen criteria for oscillations. pg no.150 (O-7,08,J-09,M-10,O-15,J-16,O-16)
14. Draw the circuit diagram for NPN transistor in Common Emitter(CE)mode. 139 (M-06,O-06)
15. Mention any three advantages of integrated circuit IC pg 154 (M-06,O-6,J-08,J-10,11,M-16)
16. What is Zener breakdown? pg.135 (O-06,J-07,M-08,J-12,13,16)
17. The voltage gain of an amplifier without feedback is 100. I negative feedback is applied with
a feedback fraction =0.1, Calculate the voltage gain after feedback. (O-06,11)
18. For Transistor to work how is the biasing provided? (J-12)
19. What is rectification? pg no.132 (M-07,09,O-14)
20. Give the important parameters (Characteristics) of an operational amplifier pg no. 164(O-07)
21. The output of two NOT gates are NOR, as shown in the figure, what is the logical operation
performed? pg no.173 (O-07)

A
Y
B

22. Draw the circuit configuration of NPN transistor in common collector (C.C) mode
pg no.139(M-08)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
58 MJK

23. A transistor is connected in CE configuration. The voltage drop across the load resistance
(Rc) 3 k is 6 V. Find the base current. The current gain  of the transistor is 0.97
pg 172.(M-08,J-10)
24. What is an integrated circuit? pg no. 154(J-08,09,O-12,M-14,O-14)
25. Find the output of the ideal operational amplifier shown in the figure for the input
of Vin=120mV direct current. pg no. 174(June 08,09,M-12,15)

39 K 

15k
Vin -
V out
+

26. What is meant by doping? pg no. 126(O-08)

27. Define output impedance of a transistor. pg no.142(O-08)
28. State De Morgan’s theorems. pg no.161 (M-08,09,J-10,M-12M-13,15,17)
29. Write the Boolean equation for the given circuit. pg no.179(J-11)

A
B

C Y

www.Padasalai.Net
30.
31.
D

Draw energy band diagrams of N-type semiconductor and P- type semiconductor. 127(M-10)
What are universal gates?Why are they called so? pg no.161 (J-12,O-13,M-16)
32. Distinguish between Avalanche breakdown and zener breakdown. pg no.134,135( M-12)
33. Draw the circuit for inverting amplifier using Op-amp. pg no.165(M-11)
34. Find the Mention any three uses of Cathode Ray Oscilloscope (CRO). pg no.170(J-09,O-14)
35. Find the output Y of the logical cicuit given below pg no.179 (O-08,M-14)
A

B
F

A
C
36. Define input impedance of a transistor connected in common emitter mode. pg 141 (J-06,11)
37. Prove the Boolean identity: (A+B)(A+C) = A+ BC pg no.179 (M-11,O-12,14)
38. Draw difference amplifier circuit using OP-Amp. pg no.168(J-11)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
59 MJK

39. What is the Boolean expression for the logic diagram shown in figure. Evaluate its output if
A =1, B=1, and C=1. pg no.179 (M-10,O-16)

A
B

Y
C
40. What are the essential components of an LC oscillator? Draw its block diagram
Pg no 152 (O-10,M-14)
41. Draw NOT gate using transistor pg no. 158(J-10,O-11,13,J-15)
42. The base current of a transistor is 50A and collector current is 25A. Find the value of
current gain . pg no.178 (J-10,O-12,M-13,O-15)
43. What are the different methods of doping a semiconductor? pg no.126 (J-13)
44. In a common base transistor circuit IC =0.97mA and IB = 30A.Calculate the value
of ( ) the current gain. (J-13)
45. Prove the following expression ( ̅ +B) (A+B) = B (O-13)
46. Find the voltage at the point B as shown in the figure (silicon diode is used) (J-14)
5V

D
1K

www.Padasalai.Net
47.
48.

49.
Differentiate analog and digital signals (J-14)
The base current of a transistor is 30A and collector current is 15A. Find the value of
current gain α.
Draw the circuit diagram of a voltage regulator using diode.
(J-15)
(M-16)
50. What is LED .Give its symbol (O-16)
51. A galvanometer of resistance 100Ω which can measure a maximum current of 1mA is converted into
an ohmmeter by connecting a battery of emf 1V and a fixed resitance of 900Ω inseries.When an external
resistance is measured the current reading is 0.1mA .Calculatethe value of resistance. (M-17)

1. State and prove de Morgan’s theorems. (M-06,O-06,09,M-10,O-10,11,J-13,J-14,M-17)

2. Explain the working of a bridge rectifier with a neat circuit diagram. (J-06)
3. With the circuit diagram. Explain voltage divider biasing of a transistor. (M-07,J-09)
4. Define current amplification factors  and  and obtain the relation between them.
(J-7,M-14,J-16)
5. Explaim the function of a transistor as a switch. ( O-7,14,M-15)
6. Draw the frequency response curve of single stage CE amplifier and discuss the results.(M-8)
7. What is an AND gate? Explain the function of AND gate using electrical circuit using
diodes. (J-08)
8. Explain the circuit symbol and Pin-out configuration of an operational amplifier. (O-08,16)
9. Explain the working of a half wave diode rectifier. (M-09,J-11,M-12,M-13,O-13,M-16)

www.Padasalai.Net
10.
11.
12
13.
Explain how multimeter is used as ohm-meter.(Multimeter diagram is not necessary) (M-11,O-15)
Explaint the functions of an operational amplifier as a summing amplifier.
Describe about N-type semi conductor.
Describe P- type semi conductor.
(J-12)

14. Explain the forward bias characteristic of a diode.

15. Explain with necessary circuit how zener diode can be used as voltage regulator. (O-12,J-15)
16. A transistor is connected in CE configuration.The voltage drop across the load resistance(RC)
3 k  is 6V .Find the base current. The current gain  = 0.97. (J-10)
17. When the negative feedback is applied to an amplifier of gain 50,the gain after feedback falls to
25.Calculate the feedback ratio. (O-09)

10 MARKS

1. With the circuit diagram, explain the working of a Bridge rectifier. Draw its input and
output signals. (M - 06, J - 07 ,M -10, J -10, O - 11, J – 12,M-14,J-16)
2. Explain with neat circuit diagram, the working of single stage CE amplifier.
Draw the frequency response curve and discuss the result. (J - 08, M- 11 M-13,O-16)
3. Sketch the circuit of a Colpitt’s oscillator and explain its working.
(J - 06, O - 06, M - 08, J - 09, J - 11, M – 12,J-14,O-15)
4. What is an operational amplifier ?With a circuit diagram, explain the working of an operational
amplifier as a summing amplifier. (M - 07, J – 12,15)
5. Explain the action of an operational amplifier as difference amplifier. (O - 07)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
61 MJK

6. What meant by feed back? Derive an expression for voltage gain of an amplifier with
negative feedback. (M – 09,J-13,M-15,17)
7. What is operational amplifier? Explain its action as (i) inverting amplifier
(ii) non-inverting amplifier. (O – 09, 13,M-16)
8. With the help of neat circuit diagram, explain the output characteristic of an NPN transistor
in CE mode and methods of finding the parameters. (J - 08, O -10, O -12)
9. With the help of neat circuit diagram, explain the input characteristic of an NPN transistor
in CE mode (O-14)

10. COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

1. High frequency waves follow (M 06, J-06,O-13,M-14,O-14)

a) the ground wave propagation b) the line of sight direction
c) ionospheric propagation d) the curvature of the earth
2. The main purpose of modulation is to
a) combine two waves of different frequencies b) acquire wave shaping of the carrier wave
c) transmit low frequency information over long distances efficiently. d) produce side bands
3. In amplitude modulation
a) the amplitude of the carrier wave varies in accordance with the amplitude of the modulating
signal. b) the amplitude of the carrier wave remains constant.
c) the amplitude of the carrier varies in accordance with the frequency of the modulating signal.
d) modulating frequency lies in the audio range.

www.Padasalai.Net
4.

5.
In amplitude modulation, the band width is
a) equal to the signal frequency
c) thrice the signal frequency
In phase modulation
b) twice the signal frequency
(M-14,J-14,O-14)

d) four times the signal frequency

a) only the phase of the carrier waves varies

b) only the frequency of the carrier wave varies
c) both the phase and the frequency of the carrier wave varies.
d) there is no change in the frequency and phase of the carrier wave
6. The RF channel in a radio transmitter produces ( Mar 13)
a) audio signals b) high frequency carrier waves
c) both audio signal and high frequency carrier waves
d) low frequency carrier waves
7. The purpose of dividing each frame into two fields so as to transmit 50 views of the picture per
second is (J -08, 12, M-12,O-13)
a) to avoid flicker in the picture
b) the fact that handling of higher frequencies is easier
c) that 50 Hz is the power line frequency in India
d) to avoid unwanted noises in the signals
8. Printed documents to be transmitted by fax are converted into electrical signals by the process of
a) reflection b) scanning c) modulation d) light variation (M- 13,J-13)
9. For communication purposes, only a part of the electromagnetic waves like ____ are being
used.
a) radio waves b) ultra violet rays c) microwaves d) radio and microwaves

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
62 MJK

ANSWERS

1.(c) 2.(c) 3.(a) 4.(b) 5.(c) 6.(b) 7.(a) 8.(b) 9.(d)

1. In television, blanking pulse is applied to (Mar 06)

a) horizontal plates b) vertical plates c) control grid d) filament
2. In an AM super heterodyne receiver, the local oscillator frequency is 1.245 MHz.
The tuned station frequency is (June-06,16)
a) 455 MHz b) 790 kHz c) 690 kHz d) 900 kHz
3. The radio waves after refraction from different parts of ionosphere on reaching the earth
are called as (June 06)
a) ground wave b) sky waves c) space waves d) micro waves
4. Digital signals are converted into analog signals using (Mar 07)
a) FAX b) Modem c) Cable d) Coaxial cable
5. In interlaced scanning time taken to scan one line is (June 07)
a) 20 ms b) 64 s c) 50 ms d) 100 s
6. The first man-made satellite is (Oct 07)
a) Aryabhatta b) Sputnik c) Venera d) Rohini
7. The audio frequency range is (Mar 08)
a) 20 Hz to 200 Hz b) 20 Hz to 2000 Hz

www.Padasalai.Net
8.
c) 20 Hz to 200000 Hz
Skip distance is the shortest distance between
d) 20 Hz to 20000 Hz

a) the point of transmission and the point of reception

b) The uplink station and the downlink station
(Oct 08)

c) the transmitter and the target d) the receiver and the target

9. An FM signal has a resting frequency of 105 MHz and highest frequency of 105.03 MHz,
when modulated by a signal. Then the carrier swing is (Mar 09)
a) 0.03 MHz b) 0.06 MHz c) 0.03 kHz d) 60 MHz

10. In an AM receiver, the local oscillator frequency is 2750 KHz. The tuned in station frequency
is (June 06)
a) 2905 kHz b) 2295 kHz c) 3055 kHz d) 2250 kHz
11. The principle used for transmission of light signals through optical fibre is
a) refraction b) diffraction
c) polarization d) total internal reflection (Mar 10, Oct 12)
12. For FM receivers, the intermediate frequency is (Oct 10,June 12)
a) 455 kHz b) 455 MHz c) 10.7 kHz d) 10.7 MHz
13. The intermediate frequency of the superheterodyne AM receiver is (June 11)
a) 455 kHz b) 10.7 MHz c) 455 Hz d) 455 MHz
14. In amplitude modulation (Oct 12)
a)the amplitude of the carrier wave varies in accordance with the amplitude of the modulating
signal b)the amplitude of the carrier wave remains constant
c) the amplitude of the carrier wave varies in accordance with the frequency of the modulating
signal d)modulating frequency lies in the audio range

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
63 MJK

15. Vidicon camera tube works on the principle of (J-13)

a)photo conductivity b)thermoelectric effect
c)thermionic emission d)seeback effect
16. In A.M receiver ,if 900 kHz station is tuned,then the local oscillator will have to produce a
frequency of : (J-14)
a) 600 kHz b) 455 kHz c) 10.7 MHz d) 1355 kHz
17. The maximurn carrier swing allowed in frequency moduiation is : (O-16)
a) 455 kHz b) 10.7 MHz c) 75 kHz d) 150 kHz
18. The resting frequency of FM transmitter is 98.5 MHz.The allowed minimum and maximum
frequency on either side of the centre frequency are (M-17)
a) 98.400 MHz and 98.600 MHz b) 98.450 MHz and 98.550 MHz
c) 98.425 MHz and 98.575 MHz b) 98 MHz and 99MHz

ANSWERS

1.(c) 2.(b) 3.(b) 4.(b) 5.(b) 6.(b) 7.(d) 8.(a) 9.(b) 10.(b) 11.(d) 12.(d) 13.(a)
14.(a) 15.(a) 16.(d) 17.(c) 18.(c)

3MARKS (1 X 3 =3 )
1. What are the advantages of digital communication? pg no.209 (M-07,J-10,M-13)
2. Define modulation factor in Amplitude Modulation.pg186 (M-6, J-8, O-9,M-10,J-11,13,M-15)
3. Write any three applications of RADAR. pg no.207 (J-06)

www.Padasalai.Net
4.
5.
6.
7.
What is meant by skip distance? pg184(J-7,M-8,J-9,O-10,M-11,J-12,O-13,M-14,O-15,M-16)
What is Fax? Mention its use.
What is the necessity of modulation?
Mention the advantages of frequency modulation.
pg no.210(O-06,14)
pg no.185(0 -08)
pg no.190(M-09)
8. Mention any three advantages of Fibre Optic Communication System. pg 212 (O-08,J-15)
9. What are the different types of radio wave propagation? pg no.181 (O-11,M-17)
10. What is amplitude modulation? pg no.186(M-12)
11. What is interlaced scanning? pg no.200 (O-12)
12. What is a Skip zone? page no.185(J-14)
13. Give 3 merits of the satellite communication. page no.213(J-16,O-16)

12. What is known as buffer? page no.193

13. What is phase modulation? page no.191
14. What are the advantages of phase modulation? page no.191
15. What is limiter? page no.196
16. Define sensitivity? page no.194
17. What is blanking pulse? page no.199
18. What are the demerits of satellite communication? page no.213

5 MARKS
1. Mention the principle of RADAR and write its applications. (M-07, 10, 12, 13)
2. What is an optical fibre? Mention the advantages of fibre optical communication system.
OR Write a short note on fibre optical communication and mention its advantages.
(J-07,M-08,O-11,M-16)
3. What are the advantages and disadvantages of digital communication? (M-06, J-06, 08, 09, 12)
4. Explain space wave propagation of radiowaves. (O-06)
5. Draw the block diagram of AM radio transmitter. (O-07,10,M-14,O-15)
6. Mention the merits and demerits of satellite communication. (J-09,13,O-13,J-15)
7. Explain with the help of block diagram, the function of FM radio transmitter.
(O-08,09,10,J-11,O-12,J-14,16)
8. With the help of block diagram, explain the operation of an FM superheterodyne receiver.

www.Padasalai.Net
(M-09,15)
9. A 10 MHz sinusoidal carrier wave of amplitude 10mV is modulated by a 5kHz sinusoidal
audio signal wave of amplitude 6Mv.Find the frequency components of the resultant
modulated wave and their amplitudes. (M-11,17)
10. Write a note on modem.
11. What are the advantages and disadvantages of Frequency modulation. (O-16)
12. What are the different types of wire and cable used for telecommunication system
13. Draw.the block diagram of a simple RADAR system. (O-14)

10 MARKS
1. Make the analysis of amplitude modulated wave. Plot and explain frequency spectrum
(J - 06, O - 06, M - 08, M - 09, J - 10, O - 10,J – 12,M-13,J-14,16)
2. With the help of a functional block diagram. Explain the operation of a super heterodyne
AM receiver. (J - 07, M - 11, M -12,O-13,16)
3. With the help of a functional block diagram, explain the function of a monochrome
TV receiver. (M - 06, M - 07, M -10, J – 11,J-13,O-14,15)

4. With the help of block diagram, explain the function of various units in the
monochrome television transmitter (J - 08, O - 08, O – 09,J-15,M-16)
5. Explain the construction and working of a vidicon camera tube with neat diagram.
(J – 09,M-14)
6. With the help of block diagram, explain the function of radar system.(O -7,O -11,O–12,M-15,17)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
65 MJK

MCQ
1.ELECTROSTATICS

1. If the capacitances of the capacitors are 5  F and 30  F in air and dielectric filled capacitors,
then the relative permittivity of the medium is…………………………
(a) 6 (b) 5 (c) 3 (d) 4

2. When the distance between the two plates of a parallel plate capacitor is halved its capacitance
value is ……………………………..
(a) halved (b) doubled(c) the same (d) increased by four times
3. If the dimension of the charged body is small in comparison with the distance from the point of
consideration then the charged body is called as…………
(a)point charge (b)unit charge (c) in finite charge (d)small charge
4. The effective capacitance of two capacitors C1and C2 in parallel is …………
1 cc
(a) C1 C2 (b) (c) C1 +C2 (d) 1 2
c1  c2 c1  c2
5. The equivalent capacitance of  n  1 identical capacitors connected in series is
1 (n  1) C
(a)  n  1 C (b) (c) (d)
 n  1 C C  n  1
6. The induced dipole moment is given as ……………….

www.Padasalai.Net
7.

8.
(a) P=E

(a) 0
(b) P =  / E
The dielectric constant of vacuum is ………….
(b) 1
(c) P =  E

(d) 3

(a)107 volts (b) 5  105 volts (c) 6  106 volts (d) 1000 volts
9. The space between two charged metallic plates is filled partly by air and partly by fibre sheet of
 r =5. The electric intensity in fibre sheet is ……………. times greater than that in air.
(a) 5 (b) 25 (c) 1/25 (d) 1/5
10. The angle between the direction of electric field and an equipotential surface is…………
(a) zero (b) 90O (c) 180O (d) 60O
11. If the potential difference between two points 2 cm apart in an electric field is 20 V, the electric
field intensity between these points will be around …………………
(a) 20 V/m (b) 40 V/m (c) 10 V/m (d) 10 V/cm
12. The work done in moving a unit positive charge from a point where the potential V1 to another
of V2 is …………….
(a) V1-V2 (b) V2-V1 (c) V1V2 (d) zero
13. The electric potential at infinity from a point charge q is ……………
(a) zero (b) infinity (c) 2q (d) q/2
14. The potential at a point near an isolated positive charge is ………….
(a) positive (b) negative (c) zero (d) either positive or negative
15. The potential energy of a system of charges 3C and 3C separated by a distance of 9 m is
(a) 3  109 Joules (b) 9  109 Joules (c) 27  109 Joules (d) 1/9  109 Joules
16. The electric potential at a point due to a charge of 100 micro coulomb at a distance of 9 metres
is ……………..
(a) 9V (b) 100 V (c) 100 micro volt (d) 105V

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
66 MJK

17. Which law relates the flux through any closed surface and the net charge enclosed within the
surface ?
(a) Ampere’s law (b) Coulomb’s law (c) Gauss’s law (d) Maxwell’s law
18. A positive charge is brought nearer to the end of an insulated conductor. Now that end is
(a) + vely charged (b) negatively charged (c) neutral (d) charged by both +ve and –ve

19. In which of the following shapes of a conductor the electrical charge is distributed uniformly
throughout the surface…………
(a)dumb-bell (b)cone (c) sphere (d) ellipsoid
20. The direction of electric field due to dipole along its axial line is ……..
(a) from –q to +q (b) from +q to –q
(c) inclined to the axial line (d) perpendicular to the axial line

21. Two equal and similar charges of 1 C separated by a distance of 2 m in air experiences
(a) attractive force of 9 X 109N (b) repulsive force of 2.25 X 109N
9
(c) attractive force of 4.5 X 10 N (d) repulsive force of 9 X 10 9N

22. If the distance between two charges is doubled the electrostatic force between the charges will
be (a) four times more (b) four times less
(c) increased two times (d) decreased two times

23. In between two unlike charges there is ………………..

(a) a force of attraction (b) a force of repulsion
(c) no action (d) infinite force

24.
www.Padasalai.Net
The force between two charges in a medium of permittivity  is ……….
(a) F 
1 q1q2
4 r 2
(b) F 
1 q1q2
4 0 r 2
 qq
(c) F  0 1 2 2
4 r
(d) F 
 q1q2
4 r 2

25. +1 coulomb is placed at a distance of 1 metre from another +1 coulomb charge. The repulsive
force between them is ……………
(a) 2 107 N (b) 9 109 N (c) 9 109 N (d) 4 107 N

ANSWERS

1.(a) 2.(b) 3.(a) 4.(c) 5.(d) 6.(c) 7.(b) 8.(a) 9.(d) 10(b) 11(d) 12(b) 13(a) 14(b) 15(b)

16(d) 17(c) 18(b) 19(c) 20(a) 21(b) 22(b) 23(a) 24(a) 25(c)

2.CURRENT ELECTRICITY
1. The resistances of a conducting wire is 10  . Thr resistance of another wire whose length is
halved and the area is doubled made up of same material is…..
(a) 10  (b) 40  (c) 2.5  (d) 25 

2. The value of the carbon resistor whose colours are red, green, yellow is …….
(a) 250  (b) 230  (c) 230 K  (d) 250 K 

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
67 MJK

3. Two wires each of length 1.3m and 2.6m which are having 0.32mm and 0.16mm as radii
respectively made up of the same material. The ratio of resistances of the wire is ……………..
(a) 8 : 1 (b) 1: 8 (c) 1:4 (d) 4:1
4. When the diameter of the conductor is doubled ,its resistance
a) decreases twice b) decreases four times
c) decreases sixteen times d) increases four times
5. Ohm’s law is true only when ………………………….
(a) temperature increases (b) temperature decreases
(c) temperature neither increases not decreases (d) temperature increases and decreases

6. The phenomenon of superconductivity occurs only at ………………….

(a) very low temperature (b) very high temperature
(c) room temperature (d) moderate temperature

7. The resistance of super conductors is ……………………………..

(a) zero (b) infinity (c) maximum (d) minimum

8. The internal resistance of a cell can be determined using ………….

(a) Ammeter (b) Voltmeter (c) Galvanometer (d) any one of the above

9. The principle of potentiometer is that the emf or potential difference connected in the secondary
is directly proportional to …………………..
(a) its balancing length (b) square of its balancing length
(c) reciprocal of its balancing length (d) reciprocal of square of its balancing length

www.Padasalai.Net
10.

11.
Mass of substance liberated at an electrode during electrolysis is …………….
(a) m  zi 2t (b) m  z 2i t

The cathode in Daniel cell is……………………..

(a) Zinc rod (b) copper rod (c) copper vessel (d) glass vessel

12. The emf of a lead – acid accumulator at the starting is ………….

(a) 2 Volt (b) 2.2 Volt (c) 1.28 Volt (d) 1.8V

13. The name of the key used in comparison of emfs using a potentiometer is ……
(a) six way key (b) jockey (c) pluck key (d) DPDT switch

14. The expression for the equivalent resistance in parallel combination is

1 1 1 1
(a) RP  R1  R2  R3 (b)   
RP R1 R2 R3
1 1 1 1
(c)  R1  R2  R3 (d) RP   
RP R1 R2 R3

15. The unit of electro chemical equivalent is ………………………..

(a) kg C (b) kg C-2 (c) kg /As (d) kg Cs-1

16. According to Faraday’s I law the mass deposited on cathode ………………

1 I t
(a) m (b) m (c) m (d) m q
It t I

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
68 MJK

17. The temperature coefficient of resistance of metals is ………………..

(a) low and +ve (b) high and +ve (c) negative (d) 

18. The blue colour ring on a carbon resistor corresponds to …………………

(a) 4 (b) 3 (c) 5 (d) 6

19. The temperature coefficient of resistance of carbon is ………………….
(a) low and +ve (b) high and +ve (c) negative (d) 

20. The formula to calculate the resistivity of the material of a wire is ……….
Pr 2 P r P r2 Pr
(a)   (b)   (c)   (d)  
L L L L
21. The drift velocity does not depend on
a) the mass of the electron b) the average relaxation time
c) the charge of the electron d) the magnetic field
22. Superconductivity was first noticed in
a) aluminium b) mercury c) copper d) lead
23. The direction of the conventional current is
a) opposite to the direction of flow of electrons
b) opposite to the direction of flow of positive ions
c) along the direction of flow of electrons
d) perpendicular to the direction of flow of electrons
24. Resistance of a metal wire of length 10cm is 2Ω .If the wire is stretched uniformly to 50 cm,the
resistance is

www.Padasalai.Net
25.
a) 20Ω b) 25Ω c) 30Ω d) 50Ω
The cells from which the electric energy is derived by irreversible chemical reactions are called
a) primary cell b) secondary cell c) voltaic cell d) none

ANSWERS

1.(c) 2.(d) 3.(c) 4.(b) 5.(c) 6.(a) 7.(a) 8.(b) 9.(a) 10(c) 11(a) 12(b) 13(d) 14(b) 15(c)

16(d) 17(b) 18(d) 19(c) 20(c) 21(d) 22(b) 23(a) 24(d) 25(a)

3.EFFECTS OF ELECTRIC CURRENT

1. To measure thermo emf using a potentiometer, the potential fall across potentiometer wire is..
(a) 1 volt per metre (b) 1 micro volt per milli metre
(c) 1 microvolt per metre (d) 1 milli volt per milli metre
2. The heating element in electric iron is made up of ………………….
(a) manganin (b) copper (c) steel (d) nichrome
3. Which one of the following is not the application of heating effect of current?
(a) electric welding (b) electric toaster (c) electric motor (d) electric arc
4. In which one of the following the heat production is minimized?
(a) electric iron (b) electric bulb (c) transformer (d) electric oven
5. If the hot and cold junctions are interchanged, the direction of current
(a) remains the same (b) reverses (c) is not at all affected (d) does not reverse

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
69 MJK

6. Peltier emf at the junctions of a thermocouple is due to ………………

(a) contact potential (b) applied potential
(c) difference in temperature (d) flow of current
7. When the temperature of two junctions of a thermocouple is the same then the difference in
contact potentials is ………………….
(a) infinity (b) zero (c) maximum (d) minimum
8. In a thermocouple the emf produced at the temperature of inversion is
(a) zero (b) maximum (c) minimum (d) infinity
9. The fuse wire has ………….
(a) high resistance and high melting point (b) high resistance and low melting point
(c) low resistance and high melting point (d) low resistance and low melting point
10. The temperature of inversion ……………………………….
(a) does not depend upon the temperature of cold junction
(b) no relation with neutral temperature
(c) depends upon the temperature of cold junction only
(d) depends upon both temperature of cold junction and neutral
11. The deflection in the galvanometer of a thermopile is proportional to ……..
(a) frequency of radiation (b) wavelength or radiation
(c) velocity of radiation (d) intensity of radiation
12. The direction of the magnetic field due to a solenoid is given by ………..
(a) Fleming’s left hand rule (b) Fleming’s right hand rule
(c) Right hand palm rule (d) Ampere’s swimming rule
13. The magnetic field ouside the solenoid is
a) infinity b) very strong c) weak d)nearly zero

www.Padasalai.Net
14. If the number of turns in a galvanometer is doubled ……………………
(a) the current sensitivity is halved
(c) the voltage sensitivity is doubled
(b) the voltage sensitivity is halved
(d) the voltage sensitivity remain uncharged

15. Phosphor – bronze wire is used as suspension wire in a galvanometer because ………………
(a) it is able to withstand more weight (b) it has large couple per unit twist
(c) it has small couple per unit twist (d) its elasticity is very low
16. A water heater is marked 1500 W ,220V .If the voltage drops to180 V ,Calculate the power
consumed by the heater
a) 1004W b) 1500W c) 2kW d) 500W
17. Thermo emf does not depend on
a) the material of the two conductors b) temperature of hot junction
c) temperature of cold junction d) length of the conductors
18. Two parallel wires carrying same current in same direction will experience
a) no force b) attractive force c) repulsive force d) magnetic Lorenz force
19. Peltier coefficient at a junction of a thermo couple depend on
a) the current in the thermocouple b) time for which current flows
c) temperature of junction d) charge that passes through the thermocouple
20. Heating elements have
a) low specific resistance b) low melting point
c) low resistance d) high specific resistance
21. When the charge moves perpendicular to the field the magnetic Lorenz force experienced is
a) maximum b) minimum c) zero d) infinity
22. The force experienced by a current carrying conductor in a magnetic field is
a) along the axis of the conductor b) perpendicular to the conductor
c) in the direction of the current d) opposite to the direction of current
23. For a given thermocouple,the neutral temperature is

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
70 MJK

a) zero b) infinity c) constant d) depends upon the temperature of cold junction

24. In a thermocouple ,at temperature of inversion the thermoemf produced is
a) minimum b) maximum c) either minimum or maximum d) zero
25. In cyclotron,the frequency of accelerated chargeincreases,
a) with increase in its mass b) with increase in magnetic field
c)with decrese in magnetic field d) with decrese in its change valu

ANSWERS
1.(a) 2.(d) 3.(c) 4.(c) 5.(b) 6.(d) 7.(b) 8.(a) 9.(b) 10(c) 11(d) 12(c) 13(d) 14(d) 15(c)

16(a) 17(d) 18(b) 19(c) 20(d) 21(b) 22(b) 23(c) 24(d) 25(b)

4. ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION AND ALTERNATING CURRENT

1. Which of the following is an example for static induction ?
(a) AC generator (b) DC generator (c) Motor (d) Transformer
2. The self inductance of a coil is equal to the magnetic flux linkage of the coil, when the current
through the coil is………………….
(a) 1 A (b) 1 A/S (c) 2 A (d) constant
3. The ends of a coil of 100 turns and 20  are a flux of 4 wb passing through it changes to half its
value in 0.5 S, the charge that flows through the coil is ……………
(a) 4C (b) 2C (c) 10C (d) 100C
4. The unit of self inductance is ………………..

www.Padasalai.Net
5.
(a)
Weber  ampere
turns

(a) ohm’s law

(b)
Weber  turns
ampere

(b) Wien’s law

(c) Kirchoffs law

(d)
Weber  turns
volt
Based on ……………. the induced current in the coil S opposes the increase in current in P.
(d) Lenz’s law
6. Which is known as generator rule ?
(a) Faraday’s law (b) Lenz’s law
(c) Fleming’s left hand rule (d) Fleming’s right hand rule
7. When a steady current flows through one coil the current induced in the adjacent coil is ………
(a) zero (b) maximum (c) minimum (d) infinity

8. In which of the following electromagnetic induction is not used ?

(a) DC generator (b) AC generator (c) Motor (d) Electric iron
9. A rectangular coil of area A is placed in a uniform magnetic field B with its plane perpendicular
to the magnetic lines of induction. The magnetic flux linked with the coil is …………………
(a) zero (b) infinity (c) + BA (d) - BA
10. 1 Weber is equal to ……………….
Nm2 N Nm
(a) (b) (c) (d) Nm-ampere
Ampere Ampere  metre Ampere
11. If a magnet is is moved fast inside a coil of insulated wire the galvanometer connected to it
shows…………………
(a)maximum deflection (b) minimum deflection (c)zero deflection (d)none of the above
12. If a magnet is moved fast inside a coil of insulated wire and kept stationery the current induced
will be ………………………
(a) maximum (b) minimum (c) zero (d) infinity

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
71 MJK

13. A transformer has 550 turns on the primary and operates on 220V mains. To get an output
voltage of 10V , the number of turns in the secondary must be ……….
(a) 4 (b) 100 (c) 50 (d) 25
14. In a step up transformer the transformer ratio (k) …………….
(a) K = 0 (b) K > 1 (c) K< 2 (d) K< 1
15. In an ideal transformer …………….
(a) Input power = output power (b) Input power  output power
(c) Input power > output power (d) Input power < out put power
16. Power over a complete cycle of an inductor circuit is given as ……………
2 2
E0 I 0 E0 I 0
(a) P  
2 0
sin tdt (b) P  
2 0
 sin 2tdt
2 2
EI EI
(c) P   0 0  sin 2tdt (d) P   0 0  cos 2tdt
2 0 2 0
17. When the plane of the coil is at right angles to B the induced emf is
(a) zero (b) maximum (c) minimum (d) infinity
18. When the plane of the coil is parallel to B the induced emf is ………….
(a) zero (b) maximum (c) minimum (d) infinity
19. The frequency of current produced by an AC generator is equal to …….
(a) number of rotations of armature in one minute
(b) number of rotations of armature in one second
(c) 1/60th rotations of armature in one hour
(d) 1/100th rotations of armature in one hour
20. The motion of the coil in a galvanometer is damped because of the ………

21.
www.Padasalai.Net
(a) suspension head
(c) formation of eddy currents

(a) using thick wire of the coils

(b) elasticity of the suspension wire
(d) restoring torque
Flux leakage in a transformer can be minimised by …………………
(b) having laminated core made up of stelloy
(c) using mumetal as core (d) using a shell type of core
22. In an Ac circuit containing Inductor only, the current……………….
(a) leads the voltage by a phase angle of  /2 (b) leads the voltage by a phase angle of 
(c) lags behind the voltage by a phase angle of  /2
(d) lags behind the voltage by a phase angle of 
23. While the current and voltage in an ac circuit containing inductor completes one cycle, the
power completes……………………….
(a) one cycle (b) two cycles (c) three cycles (d) four cycles
24. At resonance VL and Vc are …………………..
(a) in phase (b) out of phase by 180o (c) out of phase by 90o (d) out of phase by 270o

25. In an AC the emf varies …………………..

(a) both in magnitude and direction (b) only in magnitude
(c) only in direction (d) both in magnitude and direction continuously with time

ANSWERS
1.(d) 2.(a) 3.(c) 4.(b) 5.(d) 6.(d) 7.(a) 8.(d) 9.(c) 10(c) 11(a) 12(c) 13(d) 14(b) 15(a)

16(d) 17(a) 18(b) 19(b) 20(c) 21(b) 22(c) 23(a) 24(b) 25(d)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
72 MJK

5. ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES AND WAVE OPTICS

1. The amount of scattering of light, if the wavelength of light is reduced to half is ………….
(a) increased by 8 times (b) increased by 4 times
(c) increased by 16 times (d) decreased by 8 times
2. In Young’s double slit experiment, the distance between the source and the screen is doubled
and the distance between the two sources is halved then the bandwidth will be ……………
(a) decreased four times (b) increased two times
(c) increased four times (d) decreased two times
3. In Young’s experiment. Lights of wavelengths 5480 Å and 685 Å be used keeping D and d
constant, then the ratio of the fringe widths in the two cases is …………
(a) 8 : 1 (b) 1 : 8 (c) 1 : 4 (d) 4 : 1
4. The radius of curvature of the lens used in Newton’s rings is 1.5 m. The diameter of nth dark
ring is 4.5mm and that of (n+4)th dark ring is 6 mm. Then the wavelength of light used is
(a) 6635 Å (b) 6563 Å (c) 6653 Å (d) 6356 Å
5. A beam of monochromatic light enters from vacuum into a medium of refractive index  . The
ratio of the wavelengths of the incident and refracted waves is …………..
(a)  : 1 (b) 1 :  (c)  2 : 1 (d) 1 :  2
6. In Hertz’s experimental set up the distance between two metal plates A and B is …………….
(a) 6m (b) 0.6m (c) 0.06m (d) 1m

7. An atom in an excited state returns back to normal state in a time ………

(a) less than 1 sec (b) less than 10-3 sec
-5
(d) less than 10-8 sec

www.Padasalai.Net
8.
(c) less than 10 sec

For destructive interference …………………

(a) I min (a1  a2 )2 (b) I min (a1  a2 ) (c) I min (a1  a2 )2 (d) I min (a1  a2 )

9. In an electromagnetic wave the angle between the direction of propagation of the wave and the
magnetic component is ………………..
(a) 0o (b) 30o (c) 45o (d) 90o
10. In corpuscular theory when corpuscles approach a surface between two media they are
attracted. This explains ………………
(a) Refraction (b) Reflection (c) Diffraction (d) Polarisation
11. Light waves pass through vacuum because they are …………………
(a) longitudinal in nature (b) transverse in nature
(c) electromagnetic in nature (d) mechanical waves in nature

12. If an ink dot marked on a sheet of paper is viewed through calcite while rotating the
crystal……………………………
(a) both the images are stationary
(b) the ordinary image is stationary and the extra ordinary image revolves
(c) the extraordinary image is stationary and the ordinary image revolves
(d) both the images revolve.
13. In Raman spectrum stoke’s lines are lines of………………………
(a) same wavelength as that of incident radiation (b) greater wavelengths
(c) shorter wavelengths (d) particular wavelengths
14. The dark lines found in the solar spectrum are useful to ……………….
(a) determine the temperature of the sun (b) to study the sun’s surface
(c) to identify the elements in the sun’s atmosphere (d) to study about the planets.

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
73 MJK

15. The photosphere is at a temperature of ……………………………

(a) 6000 0C (b) 14 x 106 K (c) 14 x 107 0C (d) 6500 0C
16. If light from the carbon arc is made to pass through sodium vapour, the spectrum produced will
contain…………………………
(a) two yellow lines (b) two white lines (c) two dark lines (d) two green lines

17. A pure green glass when placed in the path of white light gives………….
(a) continuous emission spectrum (b) continuous absorption spectrum
(c) Line emission spectrum (d) Line absorption spectrum

18. Along the optic axis the refractive index of a calcite crystal for extraordinary ray
is…………….
(a) 1.486 (b) 1.532 (c) 1.615 (d) 1.658
19. The polarizing angle of water is ……………………………..
(a) 52.50 (b) 530 4’ (c) 57.50 (d) 47.50

20. The expression for the radius of the 4 th dark Newton’s ring is………….
(a) rn  R (b) rn  nR (c) rn  (n  1) R (d) rn  R
21. In an electromagnetic wave the angle between electric component and magnetic component is
(a) 900 (b) 600 (c) 450 (d) 300
22. According to Huygens the light waves …………
a) are longitudinal b) are transverse c)electromagnetic d) longitudinal & transverse
23. The refractive index of calcite crystal for sodium light corresponding to the extraordinary

www.Padasalai.Net
24.
ray…..
(a) varies from 1.486 to 1.658 (b) 1.658 (c)1.568
When white light is passed through dilute solution of blood …………. is produced
a) line absorption spectrum
c) band spectrum
b) band absorption spectrum
d) continuous spectrum
(d)1.868

25. Glass is …………

a)only a polarizer b) only a analyser c) as a polarizer as well as an analyser
d) neither polarizer nor an analyser

ANSWERS

1.(c) 2.(c) 3.(a) 4.(b) 5.(a) 6.(b) 7.(c) 8.(c) 9.(d) 10(a) 11(b) 12(b) 13(b) 14(c) 15(b)

16(c) 17(b) 18(a) 19(b) 20(b) 21(a) 22(a) 23(a) 24(b) 25(d)

6 . ATOMIC PHYSICS
1. The specific charge of proton (e/mp) is 9.6 x 107 C/kg. Then the specific charge of alpha
particle (e/m) is……………………
(a) 1.92x108 C/kg (b) 4.8x107 C/kg (c) 2.4x107 C/kg (d) 3.84x 108 C/kg
2. According to J.J Thomson the body of the atom without electrons is ………
(a) positively charged sphere (b) positively charges cube
(c) negatively charged sphere (d) negatively charged cube

3. According to Thomson the spectral lines are due to

(a) motion of electrons (b) SHM of electrons about mean position
(c) transition of electrons from one point to another (d) emission of energy by electrons
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
74 MJK

4. The energy of fourth excited state of hydrogen atom is ………

(a) –3.4 eV (b) – 1.51 eV (c) –0.85 eV (d) –0.54 eV
5. According to Sommerfeld out of ‘n’ sub shells ……… circular.
(a) one (b) two (c) n (d) (n-1)
6. The azimuthal quantum number varies from…………………
(a) 0 to n (b) 0 to (n-1) (c) 0 to (n+1) (d) 0 to 
7. The maximum number of electrons present in a shell of principal quantum number ‘n’
is……….
(a) n2 (b) n (c) 2n2 (d) 3n2
8. The maximum number of electrons present in ‘N’ shell is …………..
(a) 18 (b) 32 (c) 8 (d) 2
9. The minimum wavelength of X-ray is…………………….
(a) directly proportional to operating voltage
(b) inversely proportional to operating voltage
(c) directly proportional to filament current
(d) inversely proportional to filament current

10. The laser transition in He-Ne laser is …………

(a) 20.61 eV to 20.66eV (b) 20.66eV to 20.61eV
(c) 20.66 eV to 18..70 eV (d) 20.61 eV to 18.70eV
11. Gases in general are poor conductors of electricity because ………
(a) they do not have electrons (b) they do not have free electrons
(c) they do not have particles (d) they have particles
12. Most gases conduct electricity at ………….

www.Padasalai.Net
13.
(a) normal pressure (b) very low pressure (c) very high pressure (d) none of the above.
Which of the following statements is true?
(a) Cathode rays are not deflected by magnetic field
(b) Cathode rays are not deflected by electric field
(c) Cathode rays travel with the velocity of canal rays
(d) Cathode rays possess momentum and kinetic energy
14. By stoke’s law the viscous force on the oil drop due to air is ………
(a) 6  a (b) 6 V (c) 6 V (d) 6  aV
15. The nucleus of an atom is ………………..
(a) positively charged (b) negatively charged
(c) neutral (d) positively and negatively charged
16. The wave number of the first line of Lyman series is equal to ………….
(a) 3R / 4 (b) 3R / 16 (c) 3R / 36 (d) 5R / 36
17. Which one of the following is elliptical in shape ?
(a) 1s (b) 2s (c) 2p (d) 3d

18. The kinetic energy of an electron in the nth orbit is given by …………..
Z 2 me4 Zme4 Z 2 me4 Z 2 me4
(a) Ek   (b) Ek   2 2 (c) Ek   2 2 2 (d) Ek   2 2 2
8 0 n 2 h 2 8 0 n h 8 0 n h 8 0 n h
19. X – rays are not deflected by electric field. The reason is that they are ……
(a) not charged particles (b) charged particles
(c) traveling with very high velocity (d) high frequency

20. In Bragg’s experiment ………….. crystal is used for X-ray diffraction.

(a) Rock salt (b) ZnS (c)calcite (d) Quartz

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
75 MJK

21. The angle of deflection of  particle coming closer to the nucleus of atom is ……..
(a) 0 (b) 90O (c) 180 O (d) 45 O

22. Which law is used in Millikan’s oil drop experiment ?

(a) Bragg’s law (b) Ohm’s law (c) Faraday’s law (d) Stoke’s law
23. Wave number is equal to ………………..
(a) wavelength (b) frequency
(c) number of waves / unit length (d) frequency / wavelength
24. In the  scattering experiment they used ……………………
(a) silver foil (b) gold foil (c) tin foil (d) lead foil
25. Continuous X – ray spectrum ……………..
(a) has all wavelengths from 0 to 
(b) has all wavelengths from -  to + 
(c) has all wavelengths with certain range of X – rays
(d) has all wavelengths from X – rays to 

ANSWERS
1.(b) 2.(a) 3.(b) 4.(c) 5.(a) 6.(b) 7.(c) 8.(b) 9.(b) 10(c) 11(b) 12(b) 13(b) 14(d) 15(a)

16(a) 17(b) 18(c) 19(a) 20(a) 21(c) 22(d) 23(c) 24(b) 25(c)

7. DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER AND RELATIVITY

1.
www.Padasalai.Net
Stopping potential increases with ……………..
(a) increase of intensity
(c) decrease of intensity
(b) increase of frequency
(d) decrease of frequency
2. Maximum kinetic energy of photo electrons ……………..
(a) varies linearly with intensity (b) varies linearly with frequency
(c) varies with intensity (d) varies with frequency
3. The photo electric effect ceases when the frequency of light is ………….
(a) below the threshold frequency (b) above the threshold frequency
(c) equal to the threshold frequency (d) zero
4. The graph between stopping potential and frequency of radiation is a ………..
(a) straight line (b) parabola (c) curve (d) ellipse
5. The resolving power of a microscope is……………………
(a) directly proportional to the wavelength (b) inversely proportional to the wavelength
(c) independent of wavelength (d) infinity
6. The focal length of the magnetic lens used in an electron microscope depends upon………….
(a) the mass of the electrons (b) the size of the electrons
(c) the velocity of the electrons (d) None of the above
7. In Photoelectric effect, which one of the following is not true?
(a) no electrons are emitted above the threshold frequency
(b) no electrons are emitted below the threshold frequency
(c) the threshold frequency will vary with intensity of light
(d) the velocity of photo electrons decreases with increase of frequency of light
8. The velocity of photoelectrons depends on…………………….
(a) frequency of incident radiation (b) intensity of incident radiation
(c) both (a) & (b) (d) velocity of radiation.

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
76 MJK

9. The wavelength of electron is of the order of……………………….

(a) visible light (b) Ultraviolet (c) infra red (d)X-rays
10. The work function W is equal to …………….
1
(a) hv (b) hvo (c) mV 2 max (d) h0
2
11. Kinetic energy of the photo electron is equal to ……………
(a) hv (b) hvo (c) eV0 (d) eV0 2
12. Number of photo electrons emitted per second is ………… to the intensity of incident
radiation.
(a) directly proportional (b) equal (c) inversely proportional (d) not related
13. Photo electric current ……………….. with the intensity of incident radiation.
(a) increases (b) increases linearly (c) decrease (d) decreases linearly
14. The value of stopping potential when the frequency of light is equal to threshold frequency is
(a) zero (b) maximum (c) minimum (d) 
15. The threshold frequency differs …………………
(a) with different intensities (b) with different applied voltages
(c) with different materials of cathode (d) with all
16. The length of a moving rod relative to a stationary observer …………..
(a) decreases (b) increases (c) remain the same (d) becomes zero
17. The mass of a particle …………….. with its velocity.
(a) decreases (b) increases (c) remain the same (d) infinity
18. The photoelectric current depends in the
a) nature of the metal b) number of e- emitted per second

19.

20.
www.Padasalai.Net
c) velocity of e- emitted
The workfuction of caesium oxide is
a) high
d) wavelength of incident radiation

b) low
The stopping potential does not depend on
a)the intensity of incident light
c) zero d)infinity

b) th frequency of incident light

c) velocity of electrons emitted d) the nature of metal surface
21. The maximum kinetic energy of the photoelectrons depends on _______of incident light
a) frequency b) intensity c) velocity d) square of intensity
22. In which phenomena,a light ray photon is behaving like a matter particle
a) interference effect b) diffraction effect c) polarization d) light emission
23. The number of electrons emitted during photoelectric effect is directly proportional to ______
a) wavelength of incident light b) intensity of incident light
c) potential difference d) stopping potential
ℎ
24. The angular momentum of an electron rotating in a circular orbit is then radius of the
circular orbit is
.
a) b) c) d)

25. The velocity ratio of proton and α –particle when they are accelerated by the same potential ‘V’
is
a)1:1 b) √ :1 c) 1:2 d) 2:1

ANSWERS
1.(b) 2.(b) 3.(a) 4.(a) 5.(b) 6.(c) 7.(a) 8.(a) 9.(d) 10(b) 11(c) 12(a) 13(b) 14(a) 15(c)

16(a) 17(b) 18(b) 19(b) 20(a) 21(a) 22(d) 23(b) 24(a) 25(d)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
77 MJK

8. NUCLEAR PHYSICS
1. The half life period of a radioactive element is 15 hours. At the end of 30 hours the fraction of
the radioactive element remaining is……………….
(a) 0 (b) 1/3 (c) 1/2 (d) 1/4
2. If 15/16 of an artificial radioactive element decays in 176 seconds, Its half life is ………
(a) 44s (b) 42 s (c) 40 s (d) 45 s
3. The power of radiation which produces death immediately is ……………
(a) 250 mR (b) 100 R (c) 600 R (d) 1000 R

4. The percentage of initial quantity of a radioactive element remaining un decayed after six half
life periods is……………….
(a) 1.5 % (b) 3 % (c) 6.25 % (d) 1 %
5. 1 Curie is equal to activity of 1 gram of…………………….
(a) Uranium (b) Radium (c) thorium (d) Polonium
6. Radio isotope used to diagnose anemia is………………….
(a) I131 (b) Co60 (c) Na24 (d) Fe59
7. Maximum mass of leptons is…………………..
(a) 207 times Me (b) 270 times Me (c) 250 times Me (d) 273 times Me
8. Muons belong to………………………
(a) photons (b) leptons (c) baryons (d) mesons
9. Breeder reactor is one in which ………………
(a) no conversion takes place (b) both 92U 235 and 92U 238 are fissionable

www.Padasalai.Net
10.
(c) 92 U 235 is converted into

(a) a spiral path

92 U 238

(b) a zig zag path

(d) 92 U 238 is converted into

When a magnetic field is applied on a moving charge it will follow …………..….

(d) a circular path

11. Which of the following is not possible in natural radioactivity ?
(a) Emission of  particles (b) Emission of  + particles
(c) Emission of  particle (d) Emission of  rays
12. BE/A curve shows that iron nucleus is ………
(a) stable (b) unstable (c) radioactive (d) none of the above
13. Penetrating power is greater for …………
(a)  (b)  (c)  (d) light waves
14. Cobalt 60 is used for the treatment of ………..
(a) cancer (b) heart attack (c) thyroid gland (d) maintaining blood circulation
15. Atoms of the same element but of different masses are called ………
(a) isotopes (b) isobars (c) isotones (d) iso atoms
16. The average nuclear density is equal to ……….
(a) 1.816 x 1015kgm-3 (b) 1.816 x 1016kgm-3 (c) 1.816 x 1018kgm-3 (d) 1.816 x 1017kgm-3
17. The number of isotopes of hydrogen is ……….
(a) two (b) three (c) four (d) five
18. Elements having more BE/A values are ………..
(a) more stable (b) less stable (c) not stable (d) radioactive
19. The BE/A value is maximum for ………………….
(a) Cu (b) Al (c) Ag (d) Fe
20. Nuclei having mass numbers ranging from 40 to 120 are ……………
(a) stable and radioactive (b) more stable and non-radioactive
(c) less stable and radioactive (d) less stable and non-radioactive

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
78 MJK

21. Which one of the following is not deviated in its path when it goes through a magnetic field ?
(a)  rays (b)  rays (c)  rays (d) Cathode rays
22. Which one of the following travel with velocity equal to that of light ?
(a)  rays (b)  rays (c)  rays (d) Cathode rays
23. The secondary cosmic rays are produced as a result of reaction of primary cosmic rays with
nuclei of ……………………….
(a) O2 and N2 (b) O2 and H2 (c) O2 and C (d) N2 and C
24. A chain reaction is possible only when the mass of the fissionable material is…………………..
(a) infinity (b) equal to a critical mass
(c) less than the critical mass (d) greater than the critical mass

25. The cosmic ray intensity is minimum at the equator because of …………..
(a) magnetic field of earth (b) gravitational field
(c) rotation of earth (d) orientation of earth

1.(d) 2.(a) 3.(c) 4.(a) 5.(b) 6.(d) 7.(a) 8.(b) 9.(d) 10(d) 11(b) 12(a) 13(c) 14(a) 15(a)

16(d) 17(c) 18(a) 19(d) 20(b) 21(c) 22(c) 23(d) 24(d) 25(a)

9.SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND THEIR APPLICATIONS

1. A non-sinusoidal waveform is generated by ………………..
(a) Hartley oscillator (b) Colpitt oscillator

2.
www.Padasalai.Net
(c) Tuned collector oscillator (d) Multivibrator
Since the input impedance of an ideal operational amplifier is infinite,
(a) its input current is zero
(b) its output resistance is high
(c) its output voltage becomes independent of load resistance
(d) it becomes a current controlled device
3. The specific resistance of a semi-conductor lies between ……………….
(a) 10-8 to 10-2  m (b) 10-2  m to 104  m (c) 104 to 108  m (d) 0 and 
4. The resistance of a semiconductor …………….. with increase in temperature.
(a) remains constant (b) increases (c) decreases (d) increase and decrease
5. In the negative feed back amplifier …………….
(a) AF is always equal to A (b) AF is always less than A
(c) AF is always greater than A (d) AF is always greater than 2A
6. Which one of the following is not a semiconductor ?
(a) Ge (b) Si (c) In (d) Sb
7. In a positive logic 0 represents …………….
(a) ON (b) high voltage (c) true statement (d) OFF
8. The forbidden energy gap in insulator is ………..
(a) more than 3 eV (b) less than 3 eV (c) equal to 3 eV (d) 
9. The forbidden energy gap in glass is of the order of ……….
(a) 3 eV (b) 5 ev (c) 7 eV (d) 10 eV
10. The vacancy for an electron is called ………
(a) hole (b) proton (c) positive vacancy (d) negative vacancy
11. The impurity added in the process of doping is in the order of ……..
(a) 1000 ppm (b) 10 ppm(c) 100 ppm (d) 10000 ppm
12. The potential barrier of a germanium diode is ……..
(a) 0.3 V (b) 3 V (c) 7 V (d) 2 V

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
79 MJK

13. In forward biased PN junction diode the internal potential barrier is ……..
(a) opposite to the applied voltage (b) in the same direction of the applied voltage
(c) having no relation with applied voltage (d) zero
14. For proper working of a transistor, the required biasing is ……………..
(a) emitter base junction and collector base junction forward biased
(b) emitter base junction forward biased and collector base junction reverse biased
(c) emitter base junction reverse biased and collector base junction forward biased
(d) emitter base junction and collector base junction reverse biased
15. The NOR gate is represented by the Boolean equation ……………….
(a) A.B = C (b) A+B=C (c) B = A (d) A  B  C
16. In regenerative feedback amplifiers the overall gain ………………..
(a) increases (b) decreases (c) constant (d) decreases and increases
17. In a diode at forward bias the voltage at which the current starts to increase rapidly is…………
(a) cut off voltage (b) stopping potential (c) knee voltage (d) critical voltage
18. In diode forward bias current is in the order of ……….
(a) ampere (b) milli ampere (c) micro ampere (d) few ampere
19. In half wave rectifier ………… number of diodes are used.
(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4
20. The load voltage in bridge rectifier is …………
(a) same as that of full wave rectifier (b) half of that of full wave rectifier
(c) twice that of full wave rectifier (d) four times that of full wave rectifier
21. In PN junction diode reverse current depends on ………..
(a) potential barrier (b) junction current (c) forward current
(d) junction temperature
22.

23.
www.Padasalai.Net
In negative feed back the phase difference between input signal and feed back signal is ..………
(a) 00

(a) NPN
(b) 450 (c) 900

(b) PNP
(d) 1800
If the middle layer is P and the other two layers N type then the transistor is known as
(c) PNN (d) NNP
24. Which one of the following is not an active component ?
(a) Capacitor (b) Transistor (c)Diode (d) IC

25. If emitter current in a transistor is 1 mA then collector current is nearly …….

(a) 1 mA (b) 2 mA (c) 0.5 mA (d) 1.5 mA

ANSWERS
1.(d) 2.(a) 3.(b) 4.(c) 5.(b) 6.(d) 7.(d) 8.(a) 9.(d) 10(a) 11(c) 12(a) 13(a) 14(b) 15(d)

16(a) 17(c) 18(b) 19(a) 20(c) 21(d) 22(d) 23(a) 24(a) 25(a)

10.COMMUNICATON SYSTEMS
1. Surface waves are the radio waves which travel………………….
(a) along the normal to the surface of the earth (b) along the surface of the earth
(c) along the line of sight of earth (d) along the poles of the earth

2. The refractive indices of the various layers in the ionosphere………….

(a) increases with increase in electron density
(b) varies with wavelength of the incident wave
(c) remains a constant (d) do not remain a constant
3. The process in which audio signal is superimposed on high frequency carrier wave is called as
(a) synchronizing (b) scanning (c)modulation (d) demodulation

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
80 MJK

4. The difference between maximum frequency of USB and minimum frequency of LSB is ……
(a) channel width (b) modulation factor (c) frequency deviation (d) carrier swing
5. In FM transmitter, the main function of buffer is to isolate……..
(a) phase modulator from power amplifier (b) crystal oscillator from the phase modulator
(c) crystal oscillator from power amplifier
(d) phase modulator from AF amplifier
6. In vidcon camera tube, the resistance of the photoconductive layer decreases……………
(a) as the intensity of light decreases
(b) as the intensity of light increases
(c) as the frequency of light increases (d) as the frequency of light decreases
7. A high negative potential given to the control grid…………………….
(a) prevents emission of electrons from the electron gun
(b) provides emission of electrons from the electron gun
(c) prevents emission of secondary electrons from the electron gun
(d) produces secondary electrons from electron gun
8. In a 625 line system, the vertical field scan time is………………
(a) 20  s (b) 64  s (c) 20ms (d) 64ms
9. The control grid in monochrome picture tube is used to………………
(a) control the intensity of electron beam (b) produce the brightness of the spot
(c) control the intensity of electron beam and brightness of spot
(d) controls secondary electron emission
10. In twisted pair cable, the wire is twisted………………….
(a) to minimize the power (b) to minimize external noise
(c) to control interference in the transmission of light (d) to achieve maximum efficiency

www.Padasalai.Net
11.

12.
The uplink frequency of a practical satellite is……………….
(a) 5.725-70.075 GHz (b) 3.4-4.8 GHz (c) 5.075-7.725 GHz (d) 4.8-3.4GHz
In TV reception the carrier waves carrying both audio and video signals are first converted into
(a) low frequency waves (b) intermediate frequency waves
(c) high frequency waves (d) ultra high frequency waves
13. The primary colours used in TV are……………..
(a) red, green and blue (b) green, blue and yellow
(c) red, violet and yellow (d) red, blue and yellow
14. The amplitude of side bands is ……….
E mEc
(a) Ec (b) c (c) (d) mEc
2 2
15. A saw tooth potential to vertical deflector plates is called…………….
(a) blanking pulse (b) field synchronizing pulse
(c) line synchronizing pulse (d)frame synchronizing pulse
16. The waves used by Radar to defect and fix the target is
a) Radio waves b) micro waves c) IR rays d) UV Rays
17. Ionosphere contains
a) free electrons,positive and negative ions b) electrons and protons
c) protons and α particles d) α particles and electrons
18. The superposition of a signal voltage on a carrier wave is called
a) modulation b) demodulation
c) synchronization d) none of these
19. The frequency of the LSB and USB components in an AM wave are 995 kHz and 1000 kHz
respectively then the frequency of the carrier is
a) 1 kHz b) 1MHz c) 10kHz d) 100kHz

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
81 MJK

20. Modulation is free from electrical disturbance is

a) Frequency modulation b) Amplitude modulation
c) phase modulation d) Amplitude modulation & phase modulation
21. Amplitude modulation is done by an electrical circuit called
a) rectifier b) oscillator c) amplifier d) modulator
22. The interplaced scanning eliminates
a) flicker effect b) distortion c) voltage fluctuation d) high current flow
23. The time taken to scan one line in simple scanning
a) 16µs b) 32µs c) 64µs d)86µs
24. The line synchronysing pulse is applied to
a) horizontal deflector plates b) vertical deflector plates
c) cathode d) anode
25. In a monochrome TV receiver,the video signals are send to ______ of picture tube.
a) control grid of electron gun b) filament of electron gun
c) horizontal deflected plates d) vertical deflected plates

ANSWERS
1.(b) 2.(d) 3.(c) 4.(a) 5.(b) 6.(b) 7.(a) 8.(c) 9.(a) 10(b) 11(a) 12(b) 13(a) 14(c) 15(d)

16(a) 17(a) 18(a) 19(b) 20(a) 21(d) 22(a) 23(c) 24(a) 25(b)

www.Padasalai.Net

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
82 MJK

1.ELECTROSTATICS
1. Two charges are kept at a distance in air.What should be the relative permeability of the
medium in which two charges should be kept at same distance so that they experience
half of the force they experience in air?
a)0.2 b)1 c)2 d)1/2

2. The forces between two charges in vacuum is 0.1N.What is the force if the vacuum is
replaced by medium whose permittivity is 10 times that of the vacuum?
a)10N b)1N c)0.1N d)0.01N

3. A dipole consists of an electron and a proton 10-9 m apart. Calculate the electric potential
at a distance of 4 x 10-4 m from the centre of dipole on the axial line nearer to the proton.
a)9 x 10-12 V b)9 x 1012 eV c)9 X 1012V d)9 x 10-12eV

4. The charge on a given capacitor is 5C and its capacitance is 2 F.If the charge on the
capacitor is doubled.Then the capacitance is________
a)2 F b)4 F c)1 F d)10 F

5. A parallel plate condenser has oil between the plates ( =2)has a capacitance C.If the oil is
removed then the capacitance of the capacitor becomes……

www.Padasalai.Net
a) C b) 2C c) C/√ d) C/2

6. The area of each plate of a parallel plate capacitor is increased by two times.The thickness
of the dielectric medium between the plates remain same and if the relative permittivity
of the dielectric of the medium is increased by two times .Then the capacitance of the
new capacitor is….
a) increased by 4 times b) decreased by 4 times c) remains same d) none of these

7. A parallel plate capacitor has rectangular plates of 400 cm2 and are separated by a distance
of 2mm with air as medium.The charge that will appear on the plates if the potential
difference applied 200V is
a)3.54 x 10-8C b) 35.4 x 10-8C c) 354 x 10-8C d) 3.5 x 10-9C

8. Two charged metal spheres of radii 2 cm and 5 cm are connected by a wire .The ratio of
the surface charge densities is…. a) 2.5 b) 0.4 c) 12.5 d) 5

9. An infinite charged plane sheet produces a field of 2 x 105NC-1 at a distance of 5 cm,the

surface charge density is……
a) 3.54 x 106 Cm-2 b) 3.54 x 10-6 Cm-2 c)0.345C d)18.53 x 10-6 mC-2

10. The total flux over a closed surface enclosing a charge q is…….
a) 8 q b) 16 q c) q d) 36 x 109q

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
83 MJK

F
1. = 6 C1 =

= = C2 =
/
× ×
= 2 C2 =

=4 = 4 C1
2. = = 0.1N
7. C1 = =

= q =
. × − × × ×
. =
= = =0.01N × −

−
q = 3.54 × C

3. 𝜎

www.Padasalai.Net
V =

× × . × −
× −
8.
𝜎
=

𝜎
= = 2.5

= −
9. E =
×

− 𝜎 = 2 × 8.854 X 2 X 10-12 X 105

= × V
= 3.54 X 10-6 Cm-2

4. =
10. =

= = 9x 109
= 4 = 36 x 109 q

5. = 2

C1 =

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
84 MJK

2.CURRENT ELECTRICITY
1. The potential difference between two plates separated by a distance of 5ocm is 200
volts.The electric field between them is ……………..
a) 200 Vm-1 b) 400 Vm-1 c) 800 Vm-1 d) 500 Vm-1

2. A current of 10 A flows through a conductor of cross section 1mm with 1028 electrons
/m3
The drift velocity is………
a)100 ms-1 b) 160 ms-1 c)1/160 ms-1 d) 1ms-1

3. A potential difference of 500 V is applied across the ends of a conductor of resistance

100Ω .The number of electrons flowing through it in one second is…………
a)3.125 x 1019 b) 1.125 x 1019 c) 2.5 x 1019 d ) 32.5 x 1019

4. A resistance of a metal wire of length AB is 2 Ω.Another wire of length PQ of the

same metal with twice the diameter of the wire. PQ is found to have the same
resistance of 2Ω.What is the length of PQ ?
a) 4(AB) b) 2(AB) c) AB/2 d) AB/4

5. Two wires of the same material and length have resistance 16Ω and 4Ω

www.Padasalai.Net
6.
respectively.The ratio of the diameters of two wires is …….
a) √ b) √ c) 2 d) 3

The resistance of a conductor of length 1m and area 2m2 is r.Then its conductivity…….
a) 1/r b) 1/2r c) 2r d) r/2

7. The resistance of a conductor is 5Ω at 50º C and 6Ω at 100ºC.Then the resistance at 0º C

……….
a) 1 Ω b)2 Ω c) 4 Ω d) 8 Ω

8. A cell of emf 2 volts sends a current of 0.5 ampere through a resistance of 3 ohms.The
internal resistance of the cell is ……..
a) 0.66ohm b) 1 ohm c) 4 ohms d) 1.5 ohms

9. When a current of 5 ampere flows through a conductor of resistance of 3 ohm,the loss of

power due to Joule heating effect is …
a) 75 watt b) 25 watt c) 70.7 watt d) 45 watt

10. Resistance of metal wire of length 10cm is 2Ω.If the wire is stretched uniformly to 50cm,the
resistance is
a) 25Ω b) 10 Ω c)5 Ω d) 50 Ω

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
85 MJK

V
1. = 6 r = ×

= 2r
= −
= 4× = 400Vm-1
×
𝜎 = =

7. 𝑅 = 𝑅 (1+ t)
2. 𝑉 = = − − =
+
× × . × +

+ = 6+300
= ms-1
200 =1 ; =1/200
5= 𝑅 +
×
3. 𝑅 = +
= = =
+ × +
𝑉
I = 𝑅
= = 4Ω

× ×
= − =
. × × . 8. V =IR ; 2 = 0.5 ( 3+r) r= 1Ω

www.Padasalai.Net
= 3.125 x 1019

4. = 9. loss of power = I2R

= 5X5X3 =75Watt
=

= ; PQ = 4AB

×
10 R = ; 2 = x 5
5. = =
R1 =2 x 5= 10Ω
=√ = √ =2

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
86 MJK

3.EFFECTS OF ELECTRIC CURRENT

1. A current of 2A flows through a resistor for 8s and a current of 8A flows through the
same resistor for 2s.The ratio of the heat developed will be……….
a) 2:4 b) 1:2 c) 1:1 d) 1:4

2. 2A and 3A currents are passed through the heating element of an iron box.The ratio of
quantity of heat evolve is………
a) 2:4 b)3:2 c) 4:9 d) 9:4

3. In a thermocouple the neutral temperature is 320º C.If the temperature of the cold
junction is 310ºC,the temperature of inversion will be…….
a) 350 ºC b) 640 ºC c) 610 ºC d) 290 ºC

4. When a current of 9A is passed through a coil a coil 15cm radius a magnetic field of
37.68 x 10-5 T is produced at the centre of the coil .The number of turns is ………
a) 2 b) 5 c) 10 d) 15

5. The magnetic field of given length of wire for single turn coil at its centre is B. When
the same wire is made into 2 turns the new magnetic induction for the same current
is…….

www.Padasalai.Net
6.
a) B/4

An
b)B/2 c) 4B d) 2B

particle enters a magnetic field of 1 tesla with a velocity 106 m/s in a

direction perpendicular to the field.The force on particle is……..
-13
a) 1.6 x 10 N -13
b) 6.4 x 10 N c) 4.8 x10-13N d) 3.2 x10-13N

7. Two conductors each of length 16m,parallel to each other with a distance of 10 cm

between them carry the same current in the same direction in air .If the force
tending to pull them is 0.5N,What is the current in them ?
a) 65.5 A b) 500A c) 250 A d) 125 A

8. A galvanometer has internal resistance of 20Ω .It gives maximum deflection for a
current of 30mA.The resistance to be connected in series to convert it into a
voltmeter of maximum reading 3V is…..
a) 40Ω b) 49Ω c) 22Ω d) 80Ω

9. A wire of length 4m carries a current of 2 ampere is bend to form a circle.The

magnetic moment of the coil is….
a) 8/π b) 4/π c) 1/π d) 2/π

10. A current of 2A flows through a circularcoil of area 4π x 10-2 m2.The magnetic field
at the centre of the coil is……
a) 62.8 x 10-6 T b) 628 x 10-6 T c) 6.28 x 10-6 T d) 3.14 x 10-6 T

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
87 MJK

1.
6. F = Bqv sin
=
= 1 × (2 x 1.6 x 10-19 ) x 106 x sin 90º

=
× × ×
= = 3.2 x 10-13 N
× × ×

H1: H2 = 1:4

2. × −
7. F =
= = = 𝑎
× −
0.5 =
H1: H2 = 4:9 .
×
I2 =
3. 𝑖 = 2 − I = 125A

= 2× 320º −30º

= 640º − 30º = 610º C 8. R = - G = −

− 20 = 80Ω
𝑔 ×

www.Padasalai.Net
4. B =
𝑎
× − × ×
9. 2πr = 4 ; r = =
. × −
= ×
× × − A = πr2 = × =
n = 10
M = IA = 2× =

5. When 1 turn coil is made into 2 turn coil it

𝑎
radius becomes = 10. A = πa2 = 4π x 10-2
𝑎 A= 0.2 m
= ×
𝑎 −
× × ×
𝑎 B = =
𝑎 × .
= 𝑎

= 4
= 6.28 x 10-6 T
B2 = 4B

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
88 MJK

4.ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION AND ALTERNATING

CURRENT
1. The resonant frequency 𝜔 of a series RLC circuit with L=6.0H,C=6 µH and R=10Ω
is….
a) 1.66 s-1 b) 166 s-1 c) 16.6 s-1 d)0. 166 s-1

2. If the current is doubled in a coil,then the energy stored is how much times the
previous value ?
a) ½ b) ¼ c) 2 d) 4

3. If a straight conductor of length ‘l’ and of resistence R is moving perpendicular to a

uniform magnetic field of flux density B with a velocity V then the induced current will
be

a) b) c) d)
4. An ideal transformer has a power input of 10kW.The secondary current is 25
ampere.If the ratio of the number of turns in the primary and the secondary is 5:1
then the potential difference applied to the primary is …….
a) 2000V b) 1250V c) 250V d) 50V

www.Padasalai.Net
5. The current drawn by the primary coil of a step down transformer which steps
down 220V to 22V with an output power of 22W
a)22 ampere b) 10 ampere c) 1 ampere d) 0.1 ampere

6. In an a.c .circuit a resistance of R ohm is connected in series with an inductor.If

phase angle between voltage and current be 45º,the value of inductive rreactance
will be…….
a) R2/4 b)R c) both a and b d) none

7. The capacitive reactance of a 15 µF capacitor at a frequency of 2000 Hz is

6.28 Ω.Then the inductance required to produce resonance is……
a)5mH b) 0.5 mH c) 0.05mH d) 0.005mH
8. A fuse wire is having 5A current rating.What is the peak value of current it can
have ?
a) 0.707A b) 70.07A c) 0.0707A d)7.707A

9. A220V,1000watt bulb is connected across a 110Vmain supply.The power consumed

by it will be ……
a) 250W b) 500W c) 10W d) 750W

10. 420kW of electric power is supplied to a small town at a distance 8km away from
the power plant .The transmission wire has total resistance of 0.33 ohm.What is
the power loss if the power is transmitted at 21,000 V ?
a) 0.132kW b) 0.825kW c) 1.32 x 104kW d) 1.32kW

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
89 MJK

1.
6. tan =
𝜔 =
√

= −
tan45º =
√ . × ×

= √ −
= − XL = R
× ×

= 166 s-1

2. 7. At resonance XL= XC = 6.28 Ω

= 2π L =6.28
When 𝐼 becomes 2𝐼 .
L=
× . ×
= x 𝐼
=0.5 x 10-3 H
= 2L𝐼

3. 𝐼 = 8. Irms =
√

Induced current = voltage/resistance I0 = Irms × √

www.Padasalai.Net =
𝑣 = 5 × 1.414 = 7.707V

4. 𝐼 = 10,000 W
9. = ( P= I2R)
𝐼 = 25A
,
ES = =400V = =
𝑝 𝑁𝑝
= 𝑁 𝑃 = 250W
𝑝
=5 EP = 2000V 10.
×
P= VI I= = = 20A
5. 𝐼 = 22 W
Power loss = I2 R
= 220V = 20x 20 x 0.33
= 22V = 132W
𝐼 = = = 0.132 kW
𝑆

= 1A

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
90 MJK

5.ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES AND WAVE OPTICS

1. The path difference between two monochromatic light waves of wavelength 4000Å
is 2x 10-7m .The phase difference between them is……..
a) b) 2 c) 3 /2 d) /2

2. The energy of the photon is 3 x 10-19 J.The momentum of the photon is equal to …….
a) 3 x 10-11 kgms-1 b) 9 x 1011 kgms-1 c) 10 x 10-28 kgms-1 d) 10 x 10-26 kgms-1

3. In Raman effect if the wavelength of incident light and Anti stokes lines are 5461Å
and 5441Å respectively. The wavelength of the stokes line is……..
a) 5451Å b) 5481Å c) 5461Å d) 5420Å

4. In Young’s experiment the ratio 25:4 produces interference.The ratio of the

maximum to minimum intensity is….
a) 4:1 b) 3:1 c) 2:1 d) 1:1

5. In Young’s double slit experiment if the separation between the slit is halved and the
distance between the slit and screen is doubled .The fringe width will be ……
a) halved b) unchanged c) doubled d) 4 times the original

www.Padasalai.Net
6. In young’s double slit experiment ,the distance of screen from the plane of the coherent
sources is D = 2m and fringe width is 4 mm .When the distance D is increased to 2.5 m,
fringe width becomes
a) 5 mm b) 4 mm c) 3 mm d) 2 mm

7. In Young’s double slit experiment light of = 5.48 x 10-7 m and 6.85 x 10-8 m be used
in turn keeping the D and d constant.The ratio of fringe widths in the two cases is…..
a) 6 b) 8 c) 2 d) 4

8. In Newton’s ring experiment ,the radius of 10th ring is 7.07 Å.If the lens is replaced by
another lens having radius of curvature half of first lens,then the radius of the same ring
will be …..
a) 3.535 Å b) 14.14 Å c) 5 Å d)1.768 Å

9. In Newton’s ring experiment,the ratio of the radii of the 4th ring and 9th ring is…….
a) 4:9 b) 2:3 c) 16:81 d) √ : √

10. Light is incident normal on a grating of 0.005m wide with 2500 lines.The angle of
Diffraction for the first order maximum of the sodium line of wavelength = 5890Å
is ….
a) 0.2945 b)sin 0.2945 c) 2.945 d) sin -1(0.2945)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
91 MJK

1.
6. D1= 1 = 4mm D2= .
=
β
=
× × −
=
− β
×

= . −
2 = = 5x 10-3 = 5mm
2.
E = mc2
P = mc β
7. =
−
β
×
p = = ×
= 10-27
. −
= 10 x10-28 kgms-1 = − =8
. ×

8. = nR
3. = 5461Å
− Δ = 5441 Å = 𝑅 =
Δ = 5461-5441 = 20 Å
.
+ Δ = 5461+ 20=5481 Å = = (7.07)2 x =

www.Padasalai.Net
4.
𝑎
𝑎
=

+
r2 =
.
√
=
.
.
= 5Å

𝑎𝑥
= − 9. = √nR
𝑖

+
4 = √
−

= 3
r4: r9 = √ : √

= 2:3
a1:a2 = 3:1
10. sin = Nm

× . × −
5. = =
.

1
= sin = 0.2945

=4
=sin -1( 0.2945)
= 4

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
92 MJK

6.ATOMIC PHYSICS

1. The charge of an electron is 1.6 x 10-19 C .What is the energy gained by the cathode
particles when a voltage of 800V applied ?
a) 2 x 10-21 J b) 8 x 10-17 J c) 1.28 x 10-18 J d) 1.28 x 10-16 J

2. Velocity ratio of two cathode rays is 1:2.They are applied to same electric field .What is
the deflection ratio of the two cathode rays ?
a) 1:2 b) 1:4 c) 4:1 d) 2:1

3. If radius of second orbit electron for hydrogen atom is 2.12Å .What is the radius of 3rd
orbit?
a)47.77Å b) 38.35Å c)4.77 Å d) 4777 Å

4. A charge oil drop of mass 9.75 x 10-12g is suspended in a uniform electric field of
300V/cm so that it neither falls nor raises the charge on the drop is……
a) 3.185 x 10-19 C b) 31.85 x 1019 C c) 31.85 x 10-19 C d) 3.185 x 10-21 C

5. An oil drop carrying a charge q has mass m kg.It is falling freely in air with terminal
velocity v. The electric field required to make oil drop move upwards with same speed
is…..

www.Padasalai.Net
6.
a)
𝑔
b)
𝑔
c)
𝑔𝑣
d)
The energy required to remove an electron from first orbit of hydrogen atom to
outside the atom is
𝑔𝑣

a) 136eV b) 1.36eV c) 13.6eV d) 0.136 Ev

7. If 𝑖 is 0.5Å the anode voltage is………..

a) 12400V b) 3100V c) 24800V d) 248000V

8. The glancing angle at which intense reflections occur for monochromatic X-rays from
a crystal whose atomic spacing is 1.5Å is 30º .Then the wavelength of first order
spectrum is….
a) 1.5Å b)√ Å c) 1.5√ Å d)0.15Å

9. If wavelength of spectral lines of Balmer series is 16/3R where R is Rydberg’s

constant.The state from which transition has taken place is…….
a) n=2 b) n=7 c) n=4 d) n=5

10. An electron at rest is accelerated through an electric field of 200 Vm-1 if the specific
charge of electron is ‘x’ C/kg, the velocity
a) 200 ms-1 b) 200 ms c) 20√ ms-1 d) 20 √ ms-1

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
93 MJK

1.
6. Energy required
Energy gained = eV
− . − .
-19
= 1.6 X 10 X 800 = -[ ]
∞
-16
= 1.28 X 10 J
= 0+13.6=13.6eV

Å × −

2. = 7. V = = . × −
𝑖

∝ = 24800V

V1:V2 = 1:2

= = 8. 2dsin = n

× . ×
y1: y2 = 4:1 = Å
×

= 1.5Å
3. rn = n 2 r1

www.Padasalai.Net=
9.

r3 = 2.12 x =4.77Å ̅ = R[ - ] =

4. mg = Eq −
=
𝑔
q =
= 16
. X − X .
= n = 4
×
= 31.85 X 10-19 C

5. mg = 6 10. eV = mv2
Eq = mg + 6
= mg+mg =2mg 2V( ) = v2 v2 = 2× 200
𝑔
E= v = 20√ ms-1

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
94 MJK

7.DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER AND RELATIVITY

1. The work function of a photo electric material is 3.3eV .The threshold frequency
would be…..
a) 8 x 1013 Hz b) 8 x 1014 Hz c) 8 x 1015Hz d) none

2. A metallic surface when illuminated with light of 3313Å emits electron with
energies upto 0.5eV.The work function of metal is…….
a) 5.2eV b) 5.2 x 10-19 J c) 5.02 x 10-19 J d) 5.2 x 10-18 J

3. Ultra violet light of 6.2eV falls on an alluminium surface.If work function is

4.2eV,then the maximum speed of the emitted electrons will be……..
a) 3.2 x 10-19 J b) 3 x 1019 J c) 3.2 x 1019 J d) 32 x 10-19 J

4. If energy of photon corresponding to a wavelength of 6000Å is 3.32 x 10-19J,the

photon for a wavelength of 4000Å will be …….
a) 4.98 x 10-19J b) 4.44 x 10-19J c) 2.22x 10-19J d) 1.11 x10-19J

5. What is the approximate momentum of electron if its de Broglie wavelength is 2Å ?

a)3.315 x 10-34 kgms-1 b) 3.315 x 10-24 kgsm

www.Padasalai.Net
6.
c) 3.315 x 10-24 kgms-1

If an
d) 3.315 x 10-34 kgsm-1

particle and a proton are accelerated by a potential of 1.5Kv,Ythen the

ratio of de Broglie wavelength of particle to that of proton is……
a)4 : √ b) 2:1 c) 1:2√ d) 2√ :1

7. The momentum of a photon of electromagnetic radiation is 3.3 x 10-29 kgms-1.The

frequency of radiation is…..
a)15x 1013 Hz b) 1.5x 1013 Hz c)0.15 x1013 Hz d) 15x 1015 Hz

8. The momentum of an electron of de Broglie wavelength 5Å is……….

a) 1.325 x 10-24kgms-1 b) 13.25 x 10-24kgm
c) 1.325 x 1024kgms-1 d) 132.5 x 10-24gms-1

9. The length of the rod measured by a stationary observation is .Let C be the

velocity of light in vacuum.The velocity of an observer to measure the rod as half
itrs initial length is
a) 0.866C b) 0.766C c) 2C d) √ C

10. A photon of energy 10eV is incident on a photo sensitive material of work

function 2eV.The stopping potential is
a) 8eV b) 8V c) 8.2eV d) 2.8V

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
95 MJK

1.
ℎ
W = h 6. for a proton 1 =
√

−
= =
. × . × For α particle , charge = 2e, mass= 4m
ℎ . × −

ℎ
2 = =
√ √
14
= 8 × 10 Hz
= ==
√ √
ℎ
2. W = - KEmax 2 : 1 = 1:2√
. × − × ×
= −
- 0.5x 1.6 x 10-19
×

= 6 x 10-19 - 0.8 x 10-19 7. h = pc

= 5.2 x 10-19 J . × − × ×
v = = −
ℎ . ×

3. ( KE)max = ( 6.2- 4.2) = 1.5 × 1013 Hz

= 2eV −
ℎ . ×

www.Padasalai.Net= 2x 1.6 x 10

= 3.2 x 10-19 J
-19 8.

=
=

.
=

× −
× −

= 1.325 × 10-24 kgms-1

4.
𝑣 l 𝑣
9. l = l0 √ − = l0 √ −
E2 = ;

. × − ×
= 𝑣
= √ − ;
-19
= 4.98 X 10 J
𝑣 𝑣 √ √
= − = ; = ;v=
ℎ ℎ
5. = ;v=
𝑣
= 0.866c
. × −
= = 3.315 x 10-24 kgms-1 10. KE of emitted electron = 10-2=8eV
× −

Stopping potential energy =8eV

STOPPING POTENTIAL = 8V (÷ . × −

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
96 MJK

8.NUCLEAR PHYSICS

1. An atom has 108 protons and 108 neutrons.The diameter of the nucleus is………
a) 7.8F b) 8.7F c) 9.8F d) 17.7F

2. The ratio of thew radii of two nuclei with mass numbers 1 and 27 is…….
a) 1/3 b) 1/√ c) 1/ √ d) 3

3. The mass defect of helium nucleus is 0.0304 amu.The binding energy of Helium
nucleus will be….
a) 2.83MeV b) 28.3MeV c) 7.68MeV d)7.47MeV

4. Consider the nuclear reaction 92 U234 → Z ThA + 2He4 .The value of A and Z are
is…
a)A=234 ; Z=94 b) A=234: Z=90 c) A=238: Z=94 d) A=238: Z=90

5. In a thermo nuclear reaction 1.000 x 10-3 kg of hydrogen is converted into

0.993 x 10-3 kg of Helium .The energy released is…..

www.Padasalai.Net
6.
a) 0.63 x 1011J b)63 x 1010J c)21.0 x 1010J d)21.0 x 1012J

The radioactive disintegration constant of radio phosphorous is……

a)0.02310 s-1 b)0.0115 s-1 c)0.0038505s-1 d) 0.038505 s-1

7. From the Law of radioactive disintegration,the value of T1/2 is….

a) 2 b) 2 c) 2.303 x 2 d) 2.303 x 2

8. What percentage of original radio active substance is left after 5 half-life times ?
a) 2% b) 3% c) 4% d) 5%

9. Find how long it will take for 87.51 of a sample of Au 198 to decay if its half life is 2.7
days
a) 8.100 days b) 4.725 days c) 10.8 days d)12.8 days

10. For 11Na24 T1/2 =15 hrs How long does its take for 93.75 % of a sample of this
isotope to decay ?
a) 30hrs b) 15 hrs c) 45hrs d) 60 hrs

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
97 MJK

1.
6. T1/2 = 3mins =180 sec
A = Z+N
= 108+108=216 = 63 =
.
=
.
/
R = /

= 1.3 X (63)1/3 = 0.0038505 s-1

= 7.8F

/
2. = . × 𝑔
/
7. 𝑇/ =
/
=
𝑇/ = . ×
/
=
= . ×

= = . ×

www.Padasalai.Net
𝑁
8. × = = =3.33
Binding energy = 0.0304 X 931 𝑁

= 28.3MeV = 3%

4.
238
92U → zThA + 2He4 9. 87.5%= 50%+25%+12.5%
A+4 = 238
Time taken for 87.5% to decay = 3 x 2.7 = 8.1 days
A = 234
Z+2=92 ; Z= 90
10. 93.5% = 50%+25%+12.5%+6.25%
2
5. E = (∆m)C
No. of half life passed = 4

= (1- 0.993) x 10-3 x (3 x 108)2 Time taken for 93.75 % to decay = 4 x 15 = 60Hrs
= 0.007 x 9x1013
= 63 x 1010 J

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
98 MJK

9.SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND THEIR APPLICATIONS

1. In a common base connection =0.95 and 𝐼 = 1mA.The value of 𝐼 and 𝐼
respectively are
a) 1mA , 0.05mA b) 0.95mA , 0.5mA c) 1mA,0.5mA d) 0.95mA , 0.05mA

2. If the value of and 𝐼 of a transistor are 50 and 0.96mA respectively,then the value
of 𝐼
a) 0.941µA b) 941 µA c) 941mA d) 47.5mA

3. A base emitter voltage of 200mV is applied to a transistor in common emitter

configuration.If the base current is 100µA ,then the input impedance is…..
a) 2kΩ b) 1kΩ c) 0.5kΩ d) 4kΩ

4. For an amplifier,voltage gain is 10 and current is 5.The power gain is……..

a) 2 b) 50 c) 15 d) 0.5

5. The voltage amplification of an amplifier without feedback is 20,when a positive

feedback is fed with a feedback fraction of 0.01,the gain with feedback is……
a) 30 b) 25 c) 20 d) 16.7
6. If an oscillator circuit consists of an inductance of henry and a capacitance of 1

www.Padasalai.Net
pico farad connected in parallel,then the resonant frequency of the oscillator is…….
a) 10 MHz b) 1 MHz c) 20kHz d) 100 MHz

7. Two NOT gates are connected at the two inputs of NAND gate,the combination will
behave like
a) NAND gate b) AND gate c) OR gate d) NOR gate

8. In a CE transistor amplifier ,if the current gain = 100,ri =2000 Ω then the variation in
base emitter voltage required for a variation in collector current by 1mA is…….
a) 20 mV b)20V c) 0.2 V d) 2 x 10-6 V

9. If the collector current and base current of a transistor are 2mA and 500µA ,then the
emitter current is
a) 2.5mA b) 0.25 mA c) 25mA d) 250mA

l0. The dc voltage 9V from a rectifier unit is given as an input of zener under reverse bias
condition giving a current of 1mA through a 1kΩ series resisitance.The output voltage
of zener is
a) 20 mV b)8V c) 0.2 V d) 2 x 10-6 V

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
99 MJK

6. =
1. = √
𝐸

IC = 𝐼 =
√ × −
= 0.95 X 1 ==0.95 Ma 𝜋

IB = IE-IC= 1-0.05mA = 106 Hz =1MHz

2. = +
=
𝐸

7. A
= −
+ . ×
B
=
.
Y ̅ ̅ = ̅̅̅̅̅̅̅̅
= A + = A+B
× .
𝐼 = = = 0.941mA

= 941 A Δ
8. = Δ
Δ 𝐸
3. ri = Δ − −

www.Padasalai.Net
=
×
×
−
−
3
= 2 × 10 Ω = 2k Ω

Δ𝑉
100 =
Δ

= ri ΔIB
; Δ𝐼 = = 10-5A

= 2000 x 10-5 = 20mV

4.
9. IE = IB+IC
Power gain = voltage gain x current gain
= 500µA +2mA = 0.5 mA+2mA
= 10 x 5= 50
= 2.5mA

5. AF =
−
10.

= = 25 V0 = Vdc-IRS
− .

= 9-1× 10-3 ×1× 103

= 9-1

= 8

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
100 MJK

10. COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

1. If radio station transmits a signal of frequency 750 kHz ,the frequency of internal
oscillator to detect the signal in superheterodyne system of radio receiver is…….
a) 1500 kHz b)1205 kHz c) 1250Hz d)none

2. In a superheterodyne system Am receiver ,a 6oo kHz radio station is tuned.The

frequency of local oscillator is …..
a) 455 Hz b) 1055 kHz c) 255 kHz d) none

3. The frequencies produced by the local oscillator of a radio receiver of the

superheterodyne
System type is equal to the ……..
a) intermediate frequency-radio wave frequency
b) intermediate frequency + radio wave frequency
c) radio wave frequency - intermediate frequency
d) none

www.Padasalai.Net
4. The length of half wave dipole antenna at 30 MHz is……
a) 5 m b) 10 m c) 2.5 m d)15 m

5. If the length of Hertz antenna is 15 m,then frequency modulation is…….

a) 10 MHz b) 100 MHz c) 100Hz d) 10Hz

6. The maximum allowed carried swing in frequency modulation is…..

a) 150 kHz b) 75 Hz c) 40 Hz d) 800 MHz

7. If the frequency of the signal is 340 Hz the band width ofd AM wave is…….
a) 340 Hz b) 680 Hz c) 170 kHz d) 1020 Hz

8. If the maximum frequency of a modulating signal is 3000 Hz the channel width is……..
a) 1 kHz b) 6 Hz c) 6kHz d) 600 kHz
9. In AM wave if signal amplitude is 3V and carrier amplitude is 4V,then modulation
factor is……
a) 1.33 % b) 75% c) 25 % d) 2.5%

10. The length of half wave dipole antenna at 18 MHz is ……..

a) 8.334 m b) 0.8 m c) 80 m d) 83 m

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
101 MJK

1. f0-fc = 455kHz 6. carrier swing = 2 ∆ )

f0 = 750 + 455 kHz = 2 X 75 = 150 kHz

= 1205 kHz

2. f0 = 455 kHz +fc

= 455 + 600 7. Bandwidth = 2 𝜔

= 1055 Hz = 2 x 340 680 Hz

3. f0 =455 kHz +fc 8. Channel width = 2 (𝜔 ) max

= 2 x 3000 = 6000Hz = 6kHz

4 .

= ∑
𝑣 9. m =
∑
×
= =10 m

www.Padasalai.Net
= =
×

=5 m
= = 0.75 (or)75%

×
10. = =
×
5. = 15 m

= 2 x 15 =30 m = = 16.667 m
×
= = .
= =
= 10 x 106 = 10MHz
= 8.334 m

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
102 MJK

FULL PORTION-1

I Choose the correct answer: 30 x 1= 30

1. The ratio between gravitational force and nuclear force is …………..
(a) 1 : 40 (b) 40 : 1 (c) 1 : 1040 (d) 1040 : 1
2. Space wave propagation is suitable for the wave having frequency
a) above 30 MHZ b) below 300 KHZ c) above 300 KHZ d) 3 – 30 MHZ
3. A carrier wave of amplitude 12 mV is modulated by a signal wave of amplitude 8mV then
the modulation factor is
a) 150% b) 66.67% c) 33.33% d) 75%
4 The specific resistance of a wire depends on
a) its length b) its radius c) the material of the wire d) all of these
5. The ratio between the shunt and the galvanometer resistance for an ammeter is 1 :5 .The current
flowing through the galvanometer is 2 mA. The current flowing through the shunt resistance is
(a) 1mA (b) 10mA (c) 11mA (d) 0.1mA
6. The line integral in Ampere’s circuital law does not depend on ……………
(a) the shape of the path
(b) the shape of the path or the position of the wire within the magnetic field
(c) net current (d) none of the above
7. At the centre of a circular current carrying coil the magnetic lines of force are
(a) straight (b) circular (c) zig zag (d) irregular
8. Electromagnetic induction is not used in……………………………..

www.Padasalai.Net
9.

10.
(a) transformer (b) room heater
The unit of relative permittivity is
a) no unit b) C / kg
(c) AC generator

c) C2 / m2
In which of the following electromagnetic induction is not used ?
(d) choke coil

d) C / m

(a) DC generator (b) AC generator (c) Motor (d) Electric iron

11. Eddy current losses can be reduced by using ………………..
(a) soft iron core (b) laminated core (c) air core (d) steel core
12. One of the following is not a property of electromagnetic radiations ………
(a) they are generated by accelerated electric charges
(b) they require a material medium for their propagation
(c) they travel with the speed of light (d) they are transverse in nature
13. The refractice index of the medium for the polarising angle 60 is
a) 1.732 b) 1.414 c) 1.5 d) 1.468
14. Three resistance 2  ,3  ,and 5  are connected in parallel . Their effective resistance is
30
(a) 11  (b) 30  (c) 31  (d) 
31
15. Polarisation by reflection was discovered by………………
(a) Fresnel (b) malus (c) Brewster (d) Nicol
16. Which of the following is not a sinusoidal oscillator?
a) Lc oscillators b) multivibrators c) Rc oscillators d) crystal oscillator
17. Find out the shape of the conductor in which the electrical charge is distributed uniformly
throughout the surface
a) Dumb-bell b) cone c) Sphere d) elliptical

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
103 MJK

18. An air filled parallel plate capacitor is connected to a battery and allowed to charge. If a dielectric
slab is placed between the plates of the capacitor
a) the charge on the capacitor remains unchanged
b) the charge on the capacitor increases
c) the voltage across the plates of the capacitor increases
d) the capacitance of the capacitor decreases

19. If the work done in moving 6C from one point to another is an electric field is 12J, the potential
difference between them is
a) 2V b) 6V c) 12V d) 72V

20. According to Rutherford atom model the spectral lines emitted by an atom is ………..
(a) line spectrum (b) continuous spectrum
(c) continuous absorption spectrum (d) band spectrum

21. The radius of nucleus of an atom is about …………

(a) 10-10m (b) 10-12m (c) 10-13m (d) 10-14m
22. According to relativity, the length of a rod in motion
(a) is same as its rest length (b) is more than its rest length
(c) is less than its rest length
(d) may be more or less than or equal to rest length depending on the speed of the rod
23. In a nuclear reaction, there is a decrease of mass of 0.50 amu. Then the energy released in the
nuclear reaction is………………..
(a) 46.55 eV (b) 46.55 MeV (c) 465.5 MeV (d) 465.5eV

www.Padasalai.Net
24.

25.
In pair production the following pairs are formed ………..
(a) neutrons and antineutrino
(c) electrons and positrons
Geiger Muller tube is used …………………..
(b) protons and positrons
(d) protons and electrons

(a) to study the discharge of electricity through gases

(b) to find out the mass of elementary particles
(c) to find out the velocity of elementary particles (d) intersity of ionizing radiation
26. The voltage gain of an amplifier without feedback is 100. If a negative feedback is introduced,
with a feedback fraction  = 0.1, then the gain of the feedback amplifier is
(a) 9.09 (b) 10 (c) 100.1 (d) 90.9
27. In frequency modulation when the frequency deviation is f then the carrier swing is
given by
a) 2 + f b) 2 x f c) f / 2 d) f – 2
28 If –e is the charge of an electron the charge associated with a hole is
a) – e b) +e c) –2e d) +2e
29. The  of a transistor is very sensitive to changes in
a) voltage b) current c) temperature d) resistance
30. A particle mass of 1 milligram has equivalent energy ……………….
(a) 3  105J (b) 9  105 J (c) 9  1010 J (d) 9  1013 J

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
104 MJK

FULL PORTION-2

I Choose the correct answer: 30 x 1= 30

1. The electric dipoles in micro oven are …………………
(a) the food molecules (b) water molecules
(c) water molecules in the food (d) microwaves
2. In nature all charges are integral multiples of …………….
h
(a) charge of proton (b) charge of electron (c) charge of positron (d)
2
3. In a charged metallic sheet when the curvature increases the charge density…………..
(a) increases (b) decreases (c) has no change (d) is equal to zero
4. The current i is expressed as ……………………….
(a) i =q  t (b) i = q/t (c) i = t/q (d) i = 1/qt
5. The electrolyte in Lechlanche cell is ……………………………….
(a) CuSO4 (b) NH4CI solution (c) dil. H2 SO4 solution (d) dil. HCL solution
6. A nicol prism has its length and breath in the ratio
(a) 3 : 1 (b) 2 : 1 (c) 1 : 3 (d) 2 : 3
7. In a thermocouple, the temperature of the cold junction is 20OC, the neutral
temperature is 270OC. The temperature of inversion is …………..
(a) 520OC (b) 540OC (c) 500OC (d) 510OC
8. Magnetic induction at any point inside a solenoid is ……………………
(a) B  0 nI (b) B  0 NI (c) B  0 I (d) zero
9.

www.Padasalai.Net
The strength of current produced in a generator is
(a) directly proportional to the speed of revolution of armature
(b) inversely proportional to the speed of revolution of armature
(c) inversely proportional to magnetic field
(d) inversely proportional to the area of coil
10. The part of the AC generator that passes the current from the coil to the external
circuit is
(a) field magnet (b) split rings (c) slip rings (d) brushes
11. The self induced emf is given by the expression ………….
1
(a) e = L (b) e = (c) e = -L (d) e = -L
L
12. Mumetal is …………………….
(a) ferromagnetic alloy (b) an alloy with low permeability
(c) a paramagnetic alloy (d) a dia magnetic alloy

13. A diffraction pattern is obtained using a beam of red light. What happens if the red
light is replaced by blue light?
(a) bands disappear (b) no change
(c) diffraction pattern becomes narrower and crowded together
(d) diffraction pattern becomes broader and farther apart
14. The wave theory of light was proposed by ………………………..
(a) Newton (b) Maxwell (c) Huygens (d) Max Planck
15. Optic axis is the direction inside a crystal in which……………………
(a) both ordinary ray and extra ordinary ray travel with same velocity
(b) ordinary ray travel with more velocity than the extraordinary ray.
(c) Extraordinary travel with more velocity than the ordinary ray
(d) Only the extra ordinary ray travels
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
105 MJK

16. If the radius of the first orbit of a hydrogen atom is 0.53 Å, the radius of fourth orbit is

(a) 84.8 Å (b) 4.24 Å (c) 42.4 Å (d) 8.48 Å

17. The chromium ions doped in the ruby rod……………………
(a) absorbs red light (b) absorbs green light
(c) absorbs blue light (d) emits green light
18. According to Sommerfeld the velocity of the electron nearest to the nucleus is………
(a) minimum (b) maximum (c) Zero (d) infinity
19. The speed of a particle moving if the mass is equal to 3 / 2 times its rest mass is ………
(a) 2.236  107 ms-1 (b) 0.2236  108 ms-1 (c) 2.236  106 ms-1 (d) 2.236  108 ms-1
20. The value of stopping potential when the frequency of light is equal to threshold
frequency is
(a) zero (b) maximum (c) minimum (d) 
21. The photo electric effect ceases when the frequency of light is ………….
(a) below the threshold frequency (b) above the threshold frequency
(c) equal to the threshold frequency (d) zero
22. Positive rays of the same element produce two different traces in a Bainbridge mass
spectrometer. The positive ions have.
(a) same mass with different velocity (b) same mass with same velocity
(c) different mass with same velocity (d) different mass with different velocity
23. The BE/A value is maximum for ………………….
(a) Cu (b) Al (c) Ag (d) Fe
24. Which one of the following could be stopped even by a thin card board ?
(a)  rays (b)  rays (c)  rays (d) X – rays

www.Padasalai.Net
25.

26.
The reverse saturation current in a PN junction diode is only due to ………….
(a) majority carriers
Op-amp are used in ……….
(b) minority carriers (c) acceptor ions

(a) digital operations only (b) analog operations only

(d) donor ions

(c) timing circuits only (d) both analog operations and timing circuits
27. If an inverter is connected to the output of AND gate the combination is called ……
(a) NOR gate (b) NAND gate (c) OR gate (d) AND gate
28. Surface waves are the radio waves which travel………………….
(a) along the normal to the surface of the earth (b) along the surface of the earth
(c) along the line of sight of earth (d) along the poles of the earth
29. In a magnetic field canal rays are
(a) deflected towards north pole photosensitivity (b) deflected towards south pole
(c) not deflected (d) deflected in the same plane
30. Zener current does not depend upon
(a) nature of the material (b) nature of doper
(c) applied current (d) applied voltage

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
106 MJK

FULL PORTION-3

I Choose the correct answer: 30 x 1= 30

1. When two capacitors of equal capacitance value 5 are connected in parallel and series, then the
ratio of the effective capacitance is
a) 2 : 1 b) 4 : 1 c) 1 : 2 d) 1 : 4
2. A capacitance C is charged to a potential V. The toal flux of the electric field over a closed
surface enclosing the capacitor
a) CV/20 b) CV/0 c) zero d) 2CV/0
3. The ratio of force between two point charges in air and in a medium of dielectric constant 6 is
a) 1 : 1 b) 1 : 6 c) 6 : 1 d) 1 : 36
4. Two charges –q and +3q are palced at A & B respectively. Let AB = d. At a point P between A
& B the potential is zero. Then the distance AP is
a) d b) d/2 c) d/3 d) d/4
5. In a wavefront the phase difference between the successive particles
a) 0 b) /4 c) /2 d) 
6. The temperature coefficient of resistance is negative for
a) alloys and insulators b) copper and lead
c) carbon and manganin d) carbon and ebonite

www.Padasalai.Net
7.

8.
How many joules are equivalent to 1 KWh?
a) 360 J
An ideal voltmeter has
a) zero resistance
b) 3600 J c) 3.6 x 105 J d) 3.6 x 106 J

b) finite resistance less than G but greater than zero

c) resistance greater than G but less than infinity d) infinite resistance
9. Neutral temperature of thermocouple
a) is not a constant b) depends on inversion temperature
c) is a constant d) depends on the temperature of cold junction
10. Complementary to the Seebeck effect is
a) Thomson effect b) Joule’s effect c) Peltier effect d) None of the above
11. Two parallel conductors of length 10m, carrying same current, separated by 20cm in air
experiences a force of 0.9 N, then the current in each conductor is
a) 30A b) 300 A c) 300 2 A d) 300 A
12. In an ac circuit
a) the average value of current is zero b) the average value of square of current is zero
c) the average power dissipation is zero d) the rms current is 2 time of speak current
13. When 5 A current is passed for 0.5 s in the primary coil, the emf induced in the secondary coil
is 200 V. The mutual inductance is
a) 10 H b) 20 H c) 2 H d) 4 H

14. The rays that are used as a diagnostic tool in medicine and for the treatment of cancer,
is
a) gamma rays b) ultra violet rays c) X-rays d) infrared rays

15. When a point source of light in an isotrope medium is at infinity, the shape of the wave font is
a) spherical b) cylindrical c) elliptical d) plane
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
107 MJK

16. The study of electric discharge through gases gives valuable information regarding the structure
of
a) molecules b) matter c) atoms d) none of the above
17. The path of the revolving electrons in Rutherford’s atomic model is
a) circular b) elliptical c) spiral d) straight line
18. When the frequency of the incident light is less than the threshold frequency
a) a little photoelectric current is produced
b) a large photoelectric current is produced
c) no photo electric current is produced
d) the velocity of the photo electrons is large
19. In electron microscope, the electron beam is focused by varying the
a) wavelength of electron b) current through the energizing coils
c) velocity of electrons d) thickness of colloidian film.
20. The empirical formula for the nuclear radius is
a) R = r0 A1/3 b) R = r01/3 A c) R = r0 1/3 A 1/3 d) R = r0A
21. The range of nuclear force is
a) 10-10m b) 10-6m c) 10-12m d) 10-15m
22. Radio isotope used to treat brain tumour
a) Radio-lead b) Radio-Phosphorus c) Radio-iodine d) Radio-Sodium
23. The number of neutrons in a nucleus of 36Ba137 is
a) 36 b) 137 c) 101 d) 173
24. Energy bands arise due to
a) the chemical reaction b) photo electric effect

www.Padasalai.Net
c) splitting of energy levels of identical atoms which are brought very close to each other.
d) thermionic emission
25. A rectifier converts
a) d.c. to a.c. b) a.c. to d.c.
c) electrical energy to light energy d) electrical energy to mechanical energy
26. The overall performance of a transistor amplifier can be improved by
a) using positive feedback b) removing feedback
c) using negative feedback d) increasing input voltage
27. If A and B are two inputs in AND gate, then AND gate has an output of 1 when the values of
A and B are
a) A = 0, B = 0 b) A = 1, B = 1
c) A = 1, B = 0 d) A = 0, B = 1
28. In the skywave propogation, for a fixed frequency, the shortest distance between the point of
transmission and the point of reception along the surface is known as
a) bandwidth b) skip distance c) short distance d) range
29. In TV transmission (i) the picture and synchronizing pulses an sound are
a) amplitude modulated and frequency modulated respectively
b) frequency modulated and amplitude modulated respectively
c) amplitude d) frequency modulated
30. Period of rotation of Geostatioanry statellite is
a) 12 Hr b) 24 Hr c) 360 days d) 1 year
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
108 MJK

FULL PORTION-4

I Choose the correct answer: 30 x 1= 30

1. The electric field inside an electrostatic shielding is ……………..
q q
(a) zero (b) infinity (c) E= (d) E=
4  r 2 4  R 2
2. If the distance between two charges is doubled the electrostatic force between the charges will
be (a) four times more (b) four times less (c) increased two times (d) decreased two times
3. The action of points is made use of in which of the following ?
(a) Spectrometer (b) Magneto meter (c) Lightning arrestor (d) Electric motor
4. If the length of a copper wire has a certain resistance R, then on doubling the length its
specific resistance …………………
(a) will be doubled (b) will become 1/4th (c) will become 4 times (d) will remain the same
5. If the resistance of a material increases with increase in temperature then its temperature co
efficient of resistance is

6. www.Padasalai.Net
(a) zero (b) negative (c) Positive (d) None of these
Five resistances each 7  are connected in parallel The effective resistance is
(a) 14  (b) 1.4  (c) 35  (d) 5 
7. Magnetic field at a point along the axis of the circular coil carrying current at a distance x from
the centre of the coil is directly proportional to ……………..
(a) x 2 (b) x 3 (c) x -2 (d) x -3
8. The magnetic field produced at the centre of the circular coil carrying current is
(a) B  0 nI (b) B = 0 NI (c) 0I (d) nI
2a 2a 2a 2a
9. The magnetic Lorentz force on a charged particle is given in the vectorial form ……………….
(a) F  V (q  B) (b) F  B(q V ) (c) F  q(V  B) (d) F  v(q  B)
10. ……..phase a.c. is more preferred for transmitting large amount of power with high efficiency
(a) one (b) two (c) three (d) four
11. The capacitor a reactance ………….
(a) increase and decreases with frequency (b) does not change with frequency
(c) increase with frequency (d) decreases with frequency
12. The phase difference between the emf’s produced by a three phase generator is
(a) /2 (b) 3/2 (c) 2/3 (d) 5/2
13. Who discovered that the changing magnetic field with time produces an electric field ?
(a) Oersted (b) Ampere (c) Faraday (d) Lenz
14. The shape of wave front going to diffract in fraunhofer diffraction
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
109 MJK

(a) Spherical (b) cylindrical (c) Plane (d) elliptical

15. The adjacent angles of a Nicol prism are……………………….
(a) 750& 1050 (b) 720& 1080 (c) 780& 1020 (d) 720& 1180
16. An X-ray diffraction of a crystal gave first order reflection at 14014’. If the wavelength of
X-rays is 1.543 Å, the distance between the two cleavage planes is…………………..
(a) 314 Å (b) 31.4 Å (c) 3.14 Å (d) 3140 Å
17. In an X-ray tube the intensity of the emitted X-ray beam is increased by
(a) increasing the filament current (b) decreasing the filament current
(c) increasing the target potential (d) decreasing the target potential
18. Who introduced the rosette path of an electron?
(a) Bohr (b) Rutherford (c) sommerfeld (d) Kepler
19. The speed of a rocket relative to an observer for its length to be contracted 90 % of its length at
rest is ……………………
(a) 1.3  108 ms-1 (b) 0.13  108 ms-1 (c) 1.3  107 ms-1 (d) 1.3  106 ms-1
20. Kinetic energy of the photo electron is equal to ……………
(a) hv (b) hvo (c) eV0 (d) eV0 2
21. Which experimental proves Einstein’s photo electric equation ?
(a) Hallwachs experiment (b) Thomson experiment
(c) Compton experiment (d) Millikan experiment

www.Padasalai.Net
22.

23.
The shape of a nucleus in stable state is……………….
(a) elliptical

(a) Radium
(b) cone

(b) Uranium
(c) square

(c) Lead
(d) spherical
Radiation emitted by which of the following led to the discovery of radioactivity ?
(d) Radon
24. The secondary cosmic rays are produced as a result of reaction of primary cosmic rays with
nuclei of ……………………….
(a) O2 and N2 (b) O2 and H2 (c) O2 and C (d) N2 and C
25. In the forward bias characteristic curve, a diode appears as ……………
(a) a high resistance (b) a capacitor (c) an OFF switch (d) an ON switch
26. The frequency of a wave can be measured by a CRO by producing its …….
(a) wave form (b) voltage (c) current (d) Lissajon’s figures
27. The NAND gate is represented by the Boolean equation ……………….
(a) A.B = C (b) A+B=C (c) A  B  C (d) A.B  C
28. Space wave propagation is suitable for frequency………………
(a) below 30 MHz (b) above 30MHz (c) below 30 GHz (d) above 30 GHz
29. In vidicon camera, the target plate is called as………………….
(a) face plate (b) object plate (c) image plate (d) photo sensitive plate
30. For effective modulation the percentage of modulation should …………..
(a) be zero (b) be equal to 100%
(c) be more than 100% (d) not be more than 100%

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
110 MJK

FULL PORTION-5

I Choose the correct answer: 30 x 1= 30

1. Force between 2 charges is 0.5N. If the distance between then is doubled, then the force
between them will be
(a) 1.0N b) 0.125 N c) 0.20N d) 0.25N
2. A conductor wite 2F capacitance has a potential of 400V. If the potential is decreased to 200V.
Keeping the charge constant, what is the new capacitance?
(a) 2F b) 1F c) 05F d) 4F
3. The electric field at any point on the equatorial line of a dipole is
P P
(a) zero (b) infinity (c) (d)
4 0 r 4 0 r 3
4. Which one of the following is scalar quantity ?4
(a) Drift velocity (b) Current (c) Current density (d) Electric field
5. When a potential difference of 2V is applied across a wire of conductance /20–1 the
current through the wire is
(a) 3.14 A (b) 314 mA (c) 6.28A (d) 628 m A
6. The unit of electro chemical equivalent is ………………………..
(a) kg C (b) kg C-1 (c) kg C-2 (d) kg Cs-1
7. 5C rise in temperature is observed in a conductor by passing the current. When the current is

8.
www.Padasalai.Net
doubled, the rise in temperature will be approximately.
(a) 5C (b) 10C (c) 20C (d) 40C
The magnetic induction at any point on the axis of a circular coil carrying current is given
as………………..
0 nIa 2 0 nI 0 nIa 0 nIa 2
(a) B  (b) B  (c) B  (d) B 
2(a 2  x 2 )3/ 2 (a 2  x 2 )3/ 2 2(a 2  x 2 )3/ 2 2(a 2  x 2 )2 / 3
9. A wire of length 50cm moves with a velocity of 300m/min perpendicular to a magnetic field. If
the emf induced in the wire is 2V the magnetic induction is
(a) 8 x 10–3 wbm–2 (b) 0.13 wbm–2 (c) 0.013 wbm–2 (d) 0.8 wbm–2
10. A coil of 50 turns and area of cross-section of 0.1m2 has its axis perpendicular to a magnetic
induction of 0.9wb /m2, then the flux passing the coil is………….
(a) 4.5Wb (b) 45Wb (c) 0 (d) 4.5mWb
11. AF choke is a coil of …………………..
(a) large inductance and low resistance (b) large inductance and large resistance
(c) low inductance and low resistance (d) low inductance and high resistance
12. The peak value of emf generated by an AC generator is …………………….
NAB NA AB
(a) E0  (b) E0  (c) E0  NAB (d) E0 
 B N
13. Which one of the following is not an electromagnetic wave ?
(a) X-rays (b) Gamma rays (c) Radio wave (d)  -rays
14. In total internal reflection the angle of incidence inside the denser medium
(a) is greater than the critical angle (b) is lesser than the critical angle
(c) is equal to the critical angle (d) is equal to 90o
15. The angle between the plane of polarization and plane of vibration in crystal is……………….
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
111 MJK

(a) 900 (b) 600 (c) 450 (d) 300

16. In hydrogen atom, which of the following transition produce a spectral line of maximum
frequency is
(a) 2  1 (b) 6  2 (c) 4 3 (d) 5  1
17. The cathode rays are …………..
(a) stream of electrons (b) a stream of positive ions
(c) a stream of uncharged particles (d) the same as canal rays
18.  scattering experiment cannot be explained by ………….
(a) Thomson atom model (b) Rutherford atom model
(c) Bohr atom model (d) Sommerfeld atom model
19. A photon of frequency v is incident on a metal surface of threshold frequency vo. The kinetic
energy of the emitted photoelectron is …………..
(a) h ( v - vo ) (b) hv (c) hvo (d) h ( v + vo )
20. The stopping potential of a metal surface is independent of ……………..
(a) frequency of incident radiation (b) intensity of incident radiation
(c) the nature of the metal surface (d) velocity of the electrons emitted
21. When light travels from an optically rarer medium to an optically denser medium, the velocity
decreases becuawe of change in
(a) wave length (b) frequency (c) amplitude (d) phase
22. The spectra used for making dyes is
(a) line spectra (b) continuous absorption spectra
(c) Fraunhofer spectra (d) band absorption spectra

www.Padasalai.Net
23.

24.
What will be the input of A and B for the Boolean expression (A + B) (AB) = 1?
(a) 0, 0 b) 0, 1 c) 1, 0
For a transistor  = 49, its  value is  = 
d) 1, 1
= 49
1+ 1+49
(a) 49 (b) 1.02 (c) 0.98 (d) 9.8
13 13
25. The ratio active nucleus 7N decays to 6C by the emission of
(a) neutron (b) Porton (c) electron (d) Positron
26. The frequency of oscillation produced by a colpitt’s oscillator is given by

1 1 1 1
(a) f = (b) f = (c) f = (d) f =
2 LC 2 L1  L2  2M )C (C1  C2 ) LC1C2
2 2
LC1C2 (C1  C2 )
27. In negative feed back the phase difference between input signal and feed back signal is
(a) 00 (b) 450 (c) 900 (d) 1800
28. High frequency waves follow…………………..
(a) the ground wave propagation (b) the line of straight direction
(c) ionospheric propagation (d) the curvature of the earth
29. In FM transmitter, the main function of buffer is to isolate……..
(a) phase modulator from power amplifier (b) crystal oscillator from the phase modulator
(c) crystal oscillator from power amplifier (d) phase modulator from AF amplifier
30. In Fiber optic communication, the transmission loss is
(a) very high (b) low (c)high (d) zero

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
112 MJK

FULL PORTION-6

I Choose the correct answer: 30 x 1= 30

1. Force between an electron and proton separated by a distance 1A is
(a) 2.3 x 10–8 N repulsive (b) 2.56 x 10–9 N attractive
–9
(c) 2.56 x 10 N repulsive (d) 2.3 x 10–8 N attractive
2. One of non-polar molecule is ……………….
(a) HC1 (b) NH3 (c)H2 (d) H2O
3. The torque experienced by an electric dipole placed in an electrical field E is given as
(a)   PE sin  (b)   PE cos (c)   2PE sin  (d)   2PE cos
4. A charge experiences a force of 0.02N in an electric field of intensity 5 x 104m–1. The
value of the charge is
(a) 0.4C (b) 0.4C (c) 4C (d) 5 x 10–4C
5. If the resistance of a coil is 2  at 0o C and  = 0.004/o C, then its resistance at 100o C is
(a) 1.4  (b) 0  (c) 4  (d) 2.8 
-6 2
6. A wire of length 20 m and area 3.4 x 10 m has resistance 0. 1  . It's specific
resistance is
(a) 0.17 x 10-8  m (b) 3.4 x 10-8  m (c) 1.7 x 10-8  m (d) 1 x 10-8  m
7. If the radius of a coil is halved and the number of turns doubled, then the magnetic field
at the centre of the coil, for the same current will ……………

8.
www.Padasalai.Net
(a) remain unchanged
(c) get halved
(b) becomes four times
(d) get doubled
The ratio of heat liberated by a wire when two different current are passed through it is
4 : 9. The ratio of the strength of the current is
(a) 4 : 9 (b) 3 : 2 (c) 2 : 3 (d) 9 : 4
9. The thermo emf is in order of ……………………….
(a) nano volts (b) micro volts (c) milli volts (d) volts
10. While the current and voltage in an ac circuit containing inductor completes one cycle,
the power completes……………………….
(a) one cycle (b) two cycles (c) three cycles (d) four cycles
11. Number of magnetic lines passing per unit area through a surface normal to the lines is
called as
(a) magnetic flux (b)magnetic flux density (c) magnetic field (d) magnetic force
12. Large eddy currents are used in ………………..
(a) galvanometer damping (b) speedometer (c) induction furnace (d) transformer
13. The phenomenon of photo electric emission is explained by ……………
(a) electromagnetic theory and not quantum theory
(b) quantum theory and not corpuscular theory
(c) wave theory and not quantum theory (d) corpuscular theory and not wave theory
14. The value of ratio of current of scattering by two waves of wavelength 400nm and
600nm
(a) 1 : 0.66 (b) 15 : 1 (c) 5 : 1 (d) 1 : 5
15. If the velocity of light in vacuum is c then the velocity of light in a medium of refractive
index 1.6 is (a) 1.6 C (b) C/1.6 (c) 1.6/C (d) C

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
113 MJK

16. The energy required to remove an electron from the third orbit of the hydrogen atom is
(a) 13.60 eV (b) 1.51 eV (c) 3.40 eV (d) 2.00 eV
17. The ratio of areas enclosed by first three Bohr orbits of hydrogen atom is
(a) 1 : 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 8 : 27 (c) 1 : 4 : 9 (d) 1 : 16 : 81
18. In an LCR, circuit, inductance is changed from L to L/2, To keep the same resonance
frequency, C should be changed to
(a) 2 C (b) C/2 (c) 4 C (d) C/4
-7
19. A metal surface illuminated by UV light of wavelength 3  10 m. The work function
of the metal is 3.313 eV. The threshold frequency is ……………..
(a) 8  1015 Hz (b) 8  1014 Hz (c) 8  1016 Hz (d) 0.8  1014 Hz
20. The wavelength of the matter wave is independent of ………………
(a) mass (b) velocity (c) momentum (d) charge
21. If the kinetic energy of the moving particle is E, then the de Brogile wavelength is
h 2mE h
(a)   (b)   (c)   h 2mE (d)  
2mE h E 2m
22. A radioactive sample produces 5 disintegrations per second. It’s activity is
(a) 5 curie (b) 5 milli curie (c) 5 bequerel (d) 5 roentgen
23. The average nuclear density is equal to ……….
(a) 1.816 x 1015kgm-3 (b) 1.816 x 1016kgm-3
18 -3
(d) 1.816 x 1017kgm-3

www.Padasalai.Net
24.

25.
(c) 1.816 x 10 kgm
Carbon – 14 is formed in the atmosphere by ………………..
(a) UV – rays (b) X – rays (c) Radioactive rays (d) Cosmic rays
A non-sinusoidal waveform is generated by ………………..
(a) Hartley oscillator (b) Colpitt oscillator
(c) Tuned collector oscillator (d) Multivibrator
26. An oscillator converts …………
(a) DC power into AC power (b) AC power into DC power
(c) DC power into AC signal (d) AC power into DC signal
27. A device which gives an output voltage without input is …………………
(a) Amplifier (b) Modulator (c) Iconoscope (d) Oscillator
28. In amplitude modulation………………..
(a) the amplitude of the carrier wave varies in accordance with the amplitude of the
modulating signal.
(b) The amplitude of the carrier wave remains constant
(c) the amplitude of the carrier varies in accordance with the frequency of the
modulating signal
(d) modulating frequency lies in the audio range
29. The AF channel in a radio transmitter produces…………
(a) modulating wave (b) high frequency carrier wave
(c) low frequency carrier wave
(d) both modulating wave and high frequency carrier wave
30. In amplitude modulated wave if the signal amplitude is 3 volt and the carrier
amplitude is 4 volt then modulation factor is
a) 1.33 (b) 0.75 (c) 0.3 (d) 0.4

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
114 MJK

FULL PORTION-7

I Choose the correct answer: 30 x 1= 30

1. Three identical capacitors of capacitance C each are connected in series. This combination is
connected in parallel with one more identical capacitor. The capacitance of the whole
combination is
(a) 3C b) 3/C c) 4C/3 d) 3C/4
2. The unit of electrostatic energy is ……………
(a) Coulomb (b) Watt (c) Cm (d) Joule
3. The method of producing charges without any contact with another charge is known as
(a) electrostatic conduction (b) electrification
(c) electrostatic induction (d) generation
4. The average time between two successive collision of an electron is 3.64 × 10-8s. It’s mobility is
(a) 6.4 ×103m2V-1s-1 (b) 640 m-2Vs-1 (c) 6.4 ×103mV-1s-1 (d) 6.4 ×103m2Vs-1
5. A uniform wire is stretched to double its length. The ratio of resistance before & after stretching
is
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 4 : 1 (c) 2 : 1 (d) 1 : 4
6. A carbon resistance reads Red-Red-Black. What is its resistance?
(a) 2.2  (b) 22  (c) 220  (d) 22 k 
7. Nichrome wire is used as the heating element because it has …………..
(a) low specific resistance (b) low melting point
(c) high specific resistance (d) high conductivity
8. The magnetic field at points outside the solenoid is ……………….

9. www.Padasalai.Net
(a) zero (b) infinity (c) weak (d) strong
To increase the current sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer by 50% then its resistance is
increased to have new resistance twice that of initial resistance then factor with which voltage
sensitivity change
(a) 20% (b) 25% (c) 30% d) 40%
10. A DC of 5A produces the same heating effect as an AC of …………………
(a) 50 A rms current (b) 5 A peak current (c) 5A rms current (d) none of these
11. According to Faraday’s laws the induced emf e is given as …………….
d dt d d
(a) e = (b) e = (c) e = N (d) e =
dN d dt Ndt
12. Energy loss in a transformer due to Joule heating effect is called ……………
(a) copper loss (b) eddy current loss (c) hysteresis loss (d) flux loss
13. When a drop of water is introduced between the glass plate and plano convex lens in Newton’s
rings system, the ring system …………
(a) contracts (b) expands (c) remains same (d) first expands. then contracts
14. The wave front in Fraunhofer diffraction is ………………….
(a) spherical (b) cylindrical (c) elliptical (d) plane
15. If C is the velocity of light in vacuum what is the velocity of light in glass with refractive index
3/2? (a) 3C/2 (b) 2C/3 (c) C/2 (d) C
16. A Coolidge tube operates at 24800 V. The maximum frequency of X radiation emitted from
Coolidge tube is …………..

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
115 MJK

(a) 6 x 1018 Hz (b) 3 x 1018 Hz (c) 6 x 108 Hz (d) 3 x 108 Hz

17. The ionization energy of hydrogen atom is 13.6V Ionisation energy of helium atom is
(a) 3.4eV (b) 13.6 eV (c) 54.4 eV (d) 108.8eV
18. The possible elliptical orbits of electron are given by the formula…………
a l 1 b 1 b l 1 b n 1
(a)  (b)  (c)  (d) 
b n a n a n a l
19. The de-Broglie wavelength associated with an electron moving with a speed of 107 m / s is …
(a) 0.728 Å (b) 7.28 Å (c) 72.8 Å (d) 728 Å
20. Stopping potential increases with ……………..
(a) increase of intensity (b) increase of frequency
(c) decrease of intensity (d) decrease of frequency
21. Maximum kinetic energy of photo electrons ……………..
(a) varies linearly with intensity (b) varies linearly with frequency
(c) varies with intensity (d) varies with frequency
22. Nuclei having mass numbers ranging from 40 to 120 are ……………
(a) stable and radioactive (b) more stable and non-radioactive
(c) less stable and radioactive (d) less stable and non-radioactive
13
23. The half life period of N is 10.1 minute. Its life time is…………
(c) 10.1 minutes

www.Padasalai.Net
24.
(a) 5.05 minutes (b) 20.2 minutes
0.6931
(d) infinity

Who found that the radioactivity was accompanied by the transformation of one element into
another
(a) Henry Becquerel (b) Soddy (c) Rutherford (d) Fajans
25. The electrons in the atom of an element which determine its chemical and electrical properties
are called
(a) valence electrons (b) revolving electrons (c) excess electrons (d) active electrons
26. The operational amplifier consists of ………..
(a) 20 transistors 11 resistors and one capacitor (b) 11 transistors 20 resistors and one capacitor
(c) 20 transistors 11 resistors and one resistor (d) 20 resistors 11 transistors and one capacitor
27. According to Boolean Algebra (A + AB) …………
(a) A (b) AB (c) B (d) A
28. Radio waves ordinarily travel in…………………….
(a) ether medium (b) isotropic medium (c)straight lines (d) an isotropic medium
29. Television is basically a system for reproducing…………………….
(a) a still picture (b) a moving picture
(c) illusion of motion (d) bright and dark spots of the original scene
30. Which type of modulation is used for sound signal in TV transmission?
(a) amplitude modulation (b) frequency modulation
(c) phase modulation (d) signal modulation

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
116 MJK

FULL PORTION-8

I Choose the correct answer: 30 x 1= 30

1. If there are n capacitors each of capacity C are connected parallel with a source of voltage then
total energy stored is
(a) CV (b) CV2 (c) CV2/2n (d) nCV2/2
2. Vande Graff generator can produce potential difference of the order of ……………
(a) 106V (b) 107V (c) 108V (d) 109V
3. The unit of electric flux linked with a closed surface is ………………
(a) Nm2C-1 (b) Nm-2C-1 (c) Nm2C-2 (d) Nm-2C
4. A cell has an e.m.f of 2V and internal resistance 1. The external resistance is 2. The value of
current I is
(a) 4A (b) 2A (c) 0.66A (d) 1A
5. Mobility of electrons is
e em  m
(a) (b) (c) (d)
m  em e
6. The resistance of each arm of the wheatstone is bridge is 10 ohm. A resistance of 10 ohm is
connected in series with battery then the equivalent resistance across the battery will be
when the bridge is balanced
(a) 10 ohm (b) 15 ohm (c) 20 ohm (d) 40 ohm
7. A capacitor of capacitance C has reactance X. If the capacitance & frequency are doubled the
reactance would be

9.
www.Padasalai.Net
(a) 4 X

(a) infinity
(b) X/2

(b) maximum
(c) X/4
If a wire lies outside the path, the line integral of the field of that wire is
(c) minimum
(d) 2 X

(d) zero
If the current flowing in the solenoid is clockwise, the pole at the near end shows
……………..
(a) south pole (b) north pole
(c) no polarity (d) south and north pole alternately
10. The self-inductance of a straight conductor is ……………..
(a) Zero (b) infinity (c) very large (d) very small
11. SI unit of magnetic flux is ……………………………..
(a) Weber-metre (b) Weber (c) Weber/metre2 (d) Weber/metre
12. Stepdown transformer is a device which converts ……………….
(a) low voltage AC into high voltage AC (b) high voltage AC into low voltage AC
(c) low power AC into high power AC (d) high power AC into low power AC
13. If the ratio of radioactive decay constants of two elements is 9 : 16 then the ratio of their half
life period is
(a) 3 : 4 (b) 4 : 3 (c) 9 : 16 (d) 16 : 9
14. Colours produced by thin films due to interference depend on………………
(a) the thickness of the film only (b) the angle of incidence only
(c) the angle of refraction only (d)both thickness of film and angle of incidence
15. The angle of incidence of light in the pile of plates is…………………
(a) 57.50 (b) 32.50 (c) 132.50 (d) 450
16. A rod is moving with a speed of 0.8C with respect to an earth observer ‘O’. The percentage
contraction in the length of the rod according to the observer ‘O’ is
(a) 36% (b) 60% (c) 20% (d) 18%

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
117 MJK

17. X- ray is …………

(a) phenomenon of conversion of kinetic energy into radiation
(b) conversion of momentum
(c) conversion of energy into mass (d) principle of conversion of charge
18. According to Rutherford the electrons are revolving around the nucleus in ………… orbits.
(a) elliptical (b) square (c) circular (d) irregular
19. An alpha particle and a proton are accelerated by a potential difference of 1000 V. The ratio of
their de-Broglie wavelength is …………..
(a) 2 2 :1 (b) 1 : 2 (c) 1: 2 2 (d) 2 : 1
20. Photo electric current ……………….. with the intensity of incident radiation.
(a) increases (b) increases linearly (c) decrease (d) decreases linearly
21. The photoelectric current becomes equal to zero when the anode voltage is equal to …………
(a) negative potential (b) stopping potential
(c) Anode potential (d) positive potential
22. Anaemia can be diagnosed by…………………
(a) 15P31 (b) 15P32 (c) 26Fe59 (d) 11Na24
23. The binding energy per nucleon for atomic mass number is maximum when ………………….
(a) A = 40 (b) A = 48 (c) A = 52 (d) A = 56
24. The reverse saturation current in a PN junction diode is only due to

www.Padasalai.Net
25.
(a) majority carriers (b) minority carriers (c) Accepter ions
The negative feedback is used ……………….
(a) to convert the amplifier into an oscillator
(d) donar ions

(b) to improve the performance of multivibrator

(c) to improve the overall performance of the amplifier
(d) to produce sawtooth potential
26. A (A + B) = ?
(a) A (b) AB (c) A B (d) B
27. In a negative logic 1 represents ……………
(a) ON (b) high voltage (c) true statement (d) OFF
28. The RF channel in a radio transmitter produces…………….
(a) audio signals (b) high frequency carrier waves
(c) both audio signal and high frequency carrier waves
(d) low frequency carrier waves
29. The IF (Intermediate frequency) of mixer circuit in FM super heterodyne receiver is…………..
(a) 1.07 MHz (b) 10.7 GHz (c) 10.7 KHz (d) 10.7MHz
30. The frequency range of audio signal is………………..
(a) 20-200000 Hz (b) 20-2000Hz (c) 20-20000Hz (d) 2-20000Hz

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
118 MJK

FULL PORTION-9

I Choose the correct answer: 30 x 1= 30

1. The Unit of permittivity is………………
(a) C2 N-1 m-2 (b) N m2 C-2 (c) H m-1 (d) N C-2 m-2
2. When charges are distributed on a body the charge density (  ) and radius of curvature
(r) follows the equation …………..
(a)  r = const. (b)  r2 = const. (c)  /r = const. (d)  2r = const.
3. The electric potential energy of a system or charges q1 and q2 separated by a distance
“d” is equal to ………………
q1q2 q1q2 q12 q22 q1q2
(a) (b) (c) (d)
4 d 2 4 d 4 d 4 d 2
4. The current flowing in a conductor is proportional to
(a) drift velocity (b) 1/ area of cross section.
(c) 1/ number of electrons (d) square of area of cross section.
5. Superconductivity was observed when the temperature of mercury was cooled to
(a) 14.2 K (b) 4.2 K (c) 4.2oC (d) 14.2oC
6. The specific resistance of a semi conductor his between

7. www.Padasalai.Net
(a) 10–8 to 10–2m (b) 10–2m to 104m
The potential barrier of a germanium diode is
(a) 0.3V (b) 3V (c) 7V (d) 2V
(c) 104 to 108m (d) 0 and 

8. 1 curie is equal to activity of 1grm of ………….

(a) Uranium (b) Radium (c) thorium (d) polonium
9. Which of the following is an optically active substance?
(a) NaCl (b) Sugar crystal (c) turpentine oil (d) all of these
10. To increase the kinetic energy of the emitted photo electrons the ……..of the incident
light must be increased
(a) velocity (b) wave length (c) intensity (d) frequency
11. The total magnetic flux linked with a given area of coil is given as …………..
BA B cos 
(a)   nBA cos (b)   BA cos (c)   (d)  
cos  A
12. In which of the following formation of eddy current is not useful ?
(a) brake system in electric trains (b) induction furnace
(c) speedometer (d) transformer
13. In Young’s double slit experiment, the distance between the source and the screen is
doubled and the distance between the two sources is halved then the bandwidth will be
(a) decreased four times (b) increased two times
(c) increased four times (d) decreased two times
14. Unit of specific rotation is
(a) decimeter b) CC c) degree
d) degree / decimeter / unit concentration
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
119 MJK

15. The angle of inclination of the pile of plates to the axis of the tube is……..
(a) 57.50 (b) 32.50 (c) 132.50 (d) 450
16. Proton when accelerated through a potential difference of V volt has a wavelength 
associated with it. An alpha partially in order to have the same wavelength must be
accelerated through the voltage ………
(a) V (b) 4V (c) 2V (d) V/8
17. The wave number of a pectral line of hydrogen atom is equal to Rydberg’s constant. The
line is
(a) first line of Lyman series b) series limit of Lyman series
(c) first line of pfund series (d) series limit of pfund series
18. If R is Rydberg’s constant. When an electron jumps from the 3rd orbit to 2nd orbit of a
hydrogen atom, the wave length of the emitted radiation
(a) 36 / 5R b) 5R / 36 c) b / R d) R / 6
19. The wavelength associated with an electron accelerated by400 V is …………..
(a) 0.6135 Å (b) 6.135 Å (c) 61.35 Å (d) 6135 Å
20. Who experimentally demonstrated the photo electric effect at first ?
(a) J.J. Thomson (b) Hallwachs (c) Richardson (d) de Broglie
21. Number of photo electrons emitted per second is ………… to the intensity of incident
radiation.
(a) directly proportional (b) equal (c) inversely proportional (d) not related

www.Padasalai.Net
22.

23.
The half life period of a certain radioactive element with disintegration constant 0.0693
per day is
(a) 10 days (b) 14 days
56
The binding energy of 26Fe nucleus is ………
(c) 140 days (d) 1.4 days

(a) 8.8 MeV (b) 36.7 MeV (c) 37.7 MeV (d) 493 MeV
24. Laws of natural radioactivity and artificial radioactivity are …………
(a) different from each other (b) exactly the same
(c) some of them same others different (d) true for chemical reactions also
25. A multimeter can measure
(a) Voltage (b) current (c) resistance (d) all the above
26. A +A+1=? (a) A (b) 0 (c) 1
(d) A
27. The variables used in Boolean algebra can assume two values as ………..
(a) 1 and 2 (b) 1 and 3 c) 2 and 3 (d) 0 and 1
28. In phase modulation……………….
(a) only the phase of the carrier wave varies
(b) only the frequency of the carrier wave varies
(c) both the phase and the frequency of the carrier wave varies
(d) there is no change in the frequency and phase of the carrier wave
29. The intermediate frequency of mixer circuit is………………….
(a) 450KHz (b) 455KHz (c) 455MHz (d) 450MHz
30. The uplink frequency of a practical satellite is……………….
(a) 5.725-7.075 GHz (b) 3.4-4.8 GHz
(c) 5.075-7.725 GHz (d) 4.8-3.4GHz

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
120 MJK

FULL PORTION-10

I Choose the correct answer: 30 x 1= 30

1. A dipole is placed in a uniform electric field with its axis parallel to the field. It experiences.

a) only a net force b) only a torque

c) both a net force and torque d) neither a net force nor a torque.

2. There are two charges +1 µC and +5 µC .The ratio of the forces acting on them will be
a) 1:5 b) 5:1 c) 1:1 d) 1:25
3. The unit of magnetic flux is
a)Nm2C-1 b)Tesla c) weber d)Nm-1C2
4. Pick out the non-polar molecules
a) ammonia b) hydrogen c)water d) hydrogen chloride
5. The transition temperature of mercury is
a) 4.2º C b)-268.8ºC c) -277.2º K d) (a) & (c)
6. Which of the following pair of metals produce minimum thermo emf
a)Cu-Zn b) sb-Bi c) Pb-Sn d)none
7. Ohms law is true for
a) metals only b) semiconductors only
c) both for metals &semiconductor’s d) neither metals nor semiconductor’s
8.

9.
www.Padasalai.Net
The self induction of a coil does not depend upon
a) The length of the coil
c) the number of turns of the coil
To a dc current a capacitor offers a reactance
b) the resistance of the coil
d) the radius of the coil

a) Xc = 1/𝜔 b) Xc = 𝜔 c) 0 d)∞
10. In a step down transformer
a) Ep > Es b) Ip < Is c) k< 1 d) all of them
11. Chokes are used in an house in
a) Iron box b) Refrigerator c) fluorescent tube lamp d) filament lamp
12. Emission ,absorption and interaction with matter can be explained by ______
a) corpuscular theory b) wave theory
c) electromagnetic theory d) quantum theory
13. If the critical angle of the medium is 30º ,then the velocity of light in the medium s
a) 1.5 x 108 ms-1 b) 6 x 108 ms-1 c) √ x 108 ms-1 d) 3 x 108 ms-1
14. When light ray get reflected by a denser medium the path difference produced is _______
a) b) c) d) 2
15. The angle between plane of vibration and plane of polarization is
a) 0º b) 90º c) 180º d) 60º
16. The canal rays are produced in the discharge tube at the pressure of _______ of mercury
a) 0.1mm b) 1mm c) 10mm d) 0.01 mm

17. During laser action ,the life time of atom in the exited state is
a) 10-8 s b) 10-5 s c) 10-3 s d) 10-6 s
+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
121 MJK

18. The energy required to shift an electron to the second excitation level is
a) 3.4 eV b) 12.09 eV c) 10.2eV d) 13.6eV
19. If the wavelength of a radiation is 4000Å ,then its wave number is
a) 2.5 x 106 m-1 b) 4x 106 m-1 c) 25 x 106 m-1 d) 400 x 106 m-1
20. Identify the particle that has no rest mass
a) electron b) proton
c) photon d) neutron
21. The stopping potential depends upon the ________ of the fastest electron
a) charge b) velocity c) mass d) wavelength
22. The low cost cable used for communication is
a) twisted pair cable b) optical fiber
c) multi conductor flat cable d) c0-axial cable
23. Nuclear force is _____
a)Gravitational in nature b) charge dependent
c) electrostatic in nature d) charge independent
24. If the half life of neutron is 13 minutes then its mean life is ________
a) 9s b) 540 s c) 1125s d) 3.2 s
25. Muons belong to ______group
a) Baryons b) mesons c) leptons d) photons

www.Padasalai.Net
26. The valence band may be ________
a) completely filled
c) an empty band
b) partially filled
d) partially or completely filled

27. The most commonly used transistor circuit is

a) CB b) CE c) CC d) none
28. By laws of Boolean algebra A +AB =
a) A b) B c) AB d) A+B

29. Music and speech is converted into electrical signal by

a) Diode b) Transistor c) Speaker d) Microphone

30. When phosphor coating in the monochrome picture tube is struck by the electron beam it
produces ______ light.
a) white b) red c) blue d) green

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
122 MJK

ANSWERS - FULL PORTION [ 1 TO 10 ]

Test-1
1.(c) 2.(a) 3.(b) 4.(c) 5.(b) 6.(b) 7.(a) 8.(b) 9.(a) 10(d) 11(b) 12(b) 13(a) 14(d) 15(b)
16(b) 17(c) 18(b) 19(a) 20(b) 21(d) 22(c) 23(c) 24(c) 25(d) 26(a) 27(b) 28(b) 29(c) 30(d)

Test-2
1.(c) 2.(b) 3.(a) 4.(b) 5.(b) 6.(a) 7.(a) 8.(a) 9.(a) 10(d) 11(c) 12(a) 13(c) 14(c) 15(a)
16(d) 17(b) 18(b) 19(d) 20(a) 21(a) 22(c) 23(d) 24(a) 25(b) 26(d) 27(b) 28(b) 29(b) 30(d)

Test-3
1.(b) 2.(b) 3.(c) 4.(d) 5.(a) 6.(d) 7.(d) 8.(d) 9.(c) 10(c) 11(d) 12(a) 13(b) 14(c) 15(d)
16(c) 17(a) 18(c) 19(b) 20(a) 21(d) 22(c) 23(c) 24(c) 25(b) 26(c) 27(b) 28(b) 29(a) 30(b)

Test-4
1.(a) 2.(b) 3.(c) 4.(d) 5.(c) 6.(b) 7.(d) 8.(a) 9.(c) 10(c) 11(d) 12(c) 13(c) 14(c) 15(b)
16(c) 17(a) 18(c) 19(a) 20(c) 21(d) 22(d) 23(b) 24(d) 25(d) 26(a) 27(d) 28(b) 29(d) 30(d)

Test-5
1.(b) 2.(d) 3.(d) 4.(b) 5.(b) 6.(b) 7.(c) 8.(a) 9.(d) 10(a) 11(a) 12(c) 13(d) 14(a) 15(a)
16(d) 17(a) 18(a) 19(a) 20(b) 21(a) 22(d) 23(d) 24(c) 25(d) 26(a) 27(a) 28(c) 29(b) 30(b)

www.Padasalai.Net
Test-6
1.(d) 2.(c) 3.(a) 4.(b) 5.(d) 6.(c) 7.(b) 8.(c) 9.(c) 10(b)
16(b) 17(d) 18(a) 19(b) 20(d) 21(a) 22(c) 23(d) 24(d) 25(d)
11(b)
26(c)
12(c)
27(d)
13(b)
28(a)
14(c)
29(a)
15(b)
30(b)

Test-7
1.(c) 2.(d) 3.(c) 4.(a) 5.(d) 6.(b) 7.(c) 8.(a) 9.(b) 10(c) 11(c) 12(a) 13(a) 14(d) 15(b)
16(a) 17(c) 18(c) 19(a) 20(b) 21(b) 22(b) 23(d) 24(c) 25(a) 26(a) 27(a) 28(c) 29(a) 30(b)

Test-8
1.(d) 2.(b) 3.(a) 4.(c) 5.(a) 6.(c) 7.(c) 8.(d) 9.(a) 10(a) 11(b) 12(b) 13(b) 14(d) 15(a)
16(b) 17(a) 18(c) 19(b) 20(a) 21(a) 22(c) 23(d) 24(b) 25(c) 26(b) 27(d) 28(b) 29(d) 30(c)

Test-9
1.(a) 2.(a) 3.(b) 4.(a) 5.(b) 6.(b) 7.(a) 8.(b) 9.(d) 10(d) 11(b) 12(d) 13(c) 14(d) 15(b)
16(d) 17(b) 18(a) 19(a) 20(b) 21(a) 22(a) 23(d) 24(b) 2d5() 26(c) 27(d) 28(c) 29(b) 30(a)

Test-10

1.(d) 2.(c) 3.(a) 4.(b) 5.(b) 6.(b) 7.(a) 8.(b) 9.(d) 10(d) 11(c) 12(d) 13(a) 14(a) 15(b)
16(b) 17(c) 18(b) 19(a) 20(c) 21(b) 22(a) 23(d) 24(c) 25(c) 26(d) 27(b) 28(a) 29(d) 30(a)

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
123 MJK

S.NO physical Quantity Unit

1 Electric charge (q) coulomb
2 Permitivity ( or C 2 N-1 m-2
V/m (or)
3 Electric Field (E) NC-1
4 Dipole moment (P) Cm
5 Torque ( ) Nm
Potential,Potential 23 Electrochemical equivalent Kg C -1
6 difference (V) Volt
24 Peltier co-efficient ( ) Volt
7 Potential Energy (U ) ev (or)Joule
25 Thomson co-efficient  volt per ° C
8 Electric flx (  ) Nm2 C-1
26 Magnetic induction (B) tesla
9 Linear charge density ( ) Cm-1
27 Permeability or o Henry/metre
10 Surface charge density (  ) Cm-2
28 Reduction factor (k) Ampere
11 capacitance ( C ) Farad
29 Galvanometer constant (G) A/radian
12 Molecular polarisability ( ) Cm2V-1
30 Current sensitivity radian/A
13 Current (I ) ampere
31 voltage sensitivity radian/V
14 Drift velocity ( Vd ) ms -1 32 Gyromagnetic ratio C/Kg
15 Mobility (  ) m2 V-1 S -1 33 Bohr magneton Am 2
16 Current density ( J ) Am -2 weber or Nm
17
18
19
www.Padasalai.Net
Resistance ( R)
Conductance ( G )
Resistivity ( )
ohm(or) 
mho 
ohm-m
34
35
36
37
Magnetic flux 
Self inductance (L)
Mutual inductance (M)
Reactance (XL, XC )
A-1
Henry
Henry
ohm
20 Conductivity (  ) Ohm m -1
38 Impedance (Z) ohm
Temp co-efficient of
21 resistance ( ) /° C 39 Specific charge (e/m) C Kg-1
Magnetic dipole moment 40 Rydberg's constant m-1
22 (M) Am 2 41 mass defect kg or amu
42 Binding energy J (or) eV
becqurel or
43 radio activity curie
44 Radiation exposure roentgen
45 Electric energy Joule

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
124 MJK

BLUE PRINT

UNIT CHAPTER WISE 1M 3M 5M 10M TOTAL

No MARKS

1
Electrostatics 4 2 1 1 25

2
Current Electricity 1 3 2 --- 20

3
Effects of Electric current 2 1 1 1 20

4
Electromagnetic induction & 4 2 1 1 25
alternating current

www.Padasalai.Net
6
Electromagnetic waves & wave
optics
4 2 1 1 25

Atomic physics 4 2 1 1 25

7
Dual nature of radiation & matter- 2 1 2 --- 15
relativity

8
Nuclear physics 4 2 1 1 25

9
Semiconductor devices & their 3 4 1 1 30
applications

10
Communication systems 2 1 1 1 20

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html
www.Padasalai.Net www.TrbTnpsc.com

+2 PHYSICS
125 MJK

Answer paper bookback one mark

1. 11. 21. 31. 41. 51. 61. 71. 81. 91. 101. 111. 121. 131.
2. 12. 22. 32. 42. 52. 62. 72. 82. 92. 102. 112. 122. 132.
3. 13. 23. 33. 43. 53. 63. 73. 83. 93. 103. 113. 123. 133.
4. 14. 24. 34. 44. 54. 64. 74. 84. 94. 104. 114. 124. 134.
5. 15. 25. 35. 45. 55. 65. 75. 85. 95. 105. 115. 125.
6. 16. 26. 36. 46. 56. 66. 76. 86. 96. 106. 116. 126.
7. 17. 27. 37. 47. 57. 67. 77. 87. 97. 107. 117. 127.
8. 18. 28. 38. 48. 58. 68. 78. 88. 98. 108. 118. 128.
9. 19. 29. 39. 49. 59. 69. 79. 89. 99. 109. 119. 129.
10. 20. 30. 40. 50. 60. 70. 80. 90. 100. 110. 120. 130.

1. 11. 21. 31. 41. 51. 61. 71. 81. 91. 101. 111. 121. 131.
2. 12. 22. 32. 42. 52. 62. 72. 82. 92. 102. 112. 122. 132.
3. 13. 23. 33. 43. 53. 63. 73. 83. 93. 103. 113. 123. 133.
4. 14. 24. 34. 44. 54. 64. 74. 84. 94. 104. 114. 124. 134.
5. 15. 25. 35. 45. 55. 65. 75. 85. 95. 105. 115. 125.
6. 16. 26. 36. 46. 56. 66. 76. 86. 96. 106. 116. 126.
7. 17. 27. 37. 47. 57. 67. 77. 87. 97. 107. 117. 127.
8. 18. 28. 38. 48. 58. 68. 78. 88. 98. 108. 118. 128.
9.
10.
www.Padasalai.Net
19.
20.
29.
30.
39.
40.
49.
50.
59.
60.
69.
70.
79.
80.
89.
90.
99.
100.
109.
110.
119.
120.
129.
130.

+2 PHYSICS Q-BANK

http://www.trbtnpsc.com/2013/07/latest-12th-study-materials-2013.html

Bihar Board Physics Question
No ratings yet
Bihar Board Physics Question
34 pages
Radiation Production and Characteristics Lecture2021 22
No ratings yet
Radiation Production and Characteristics Lecture2021 22
188 pages
+2 - Physics EM VVI 1mark QB by Raja Sheker PDF
No ratings yet
+2 - Physics EM VVI 1mark QB by Raja Sheker PDF
61 pages
OLD SYLLABUS PUBLICone Marks Inside CREATIVE
No ratings yet
OLD SYLLABUS PUBLICone Marks Inside CREATIVE
28 pages
12 STD Physics Unit Test
No ratings yet
12 STD Physics Unit Test
3 pages
Ks Blackened Xii Pem 1 3 5 10 Us 12 17th Feb13 PDF
No ratings yet
Ks Blackened Xii Pem 1 3 5 10 Us 12 17th Feb13 PDF
23 pages
Namma Kalvi 12th Physics Volume 1 Study Material em 214019
33% (6)
Namma Kalvi 12th Physics Volume 1 Study Material em 214019
96 pages
Chapter - 01 Electrostatic DPP-01
No ratings yet
Chapter - 01 Electrostatic DPP-01
4 pages
QB 2 For 12STD
No ratings yet
QB 2 For 12STD
42 pages
Class-12 - Ism Worksheet 2024-25 - One Hour - Phy
No ratings yet
Class-12 - Ism Worksheet 2024-25 - One Hour - Phy
41 pages
12th-Physics-Unit-Test-Volume-1-Questions-English-Medium-PDF-Download
No ratings yet
12th-Physics-Unit-Test-Volume-1-Questions-English-Medium-PDF-Download
13 pages
Test Paper
No ratings yet
Test Paper
2 pages
Simplified Material Physics 10+2
No ratings yet
Simplified Material Physics 10+2
42 pages
PTRetest_20242025
No ratings yet
PTRetest_20242025
3 pages
Wa0002.
No ratings yet
Wa0002.
12 pages
MT April
No ratings yet
MT April
2 pages
FinalExam_Physics2_Fall2016_2017 with 16MCQvB
No ratings yet
FinalExam_Physics2_Fall2016_2017 with 16MCQvB
9 pages
Unit 01 (Rts) Answer Key
No ratings yet
Unit 01 (Rts) Answer Key
16 pages
Physics M. Palanichamy : Part-A: Answer All The Questions
No ratings yet
Physics M. Palanichamy : Part-A: Answer All The Questions
3 pages
STD.12 Abc-Physics
No ratings yet
STD.12 Abc-Physics
4 pages
20-12th Physics - Unit 1 Questions and Answers - English Medium PDF Download
No ratings yet
20-12th Physics - Unit 1 Questions and Answers - English Medium PDF Download
14 pages
Psychology 2024
No ratings yet
Psychology 2024
13 pages
Electric field assignment
No ratings yet
Electric field assignment
4 pages
QuestionBank 12thStd Physics (Theory)
No ratings yet
QuestionBank 12thStd Physics (Theory)
6 pages
ELECTROSTATICS MCQs
No ratings yet
ELECTROSTATICS MCQs
9 pages
Screenshot 2024-10-16 at 12.11.47 PM
No ratings yet
Screenshot 2024-10-16 at 12.11.47 PM
2 pages
Worksheet Physics 43
No ratings yet
Worksheet Physics 43
3 pages
electric charges and fields QUESTION gk
No ratings yet
electric charges and fields QUESTION gk
11 pages
Sample paper1 CLASS XII(PHYSICS) answer key
No ratings yet
Sample paper1 CLASS XII(PHYSICS) answer key
13 pages
PT-1B
No ratings yet
PT-1B
4 pages
HDHW Mcq-Ar Electrostatics Xii 2024
No ratings yet
HDHW Mcq-Ar Electrostatics Xii 2024
14 pages
Xii Physics June Set 1
No ratings yet
Xii Physics June Set 1
4 pages
class-12-chap-1^0
No ratings yet
class-12-chap-1^0
2 pages
Physics - XII (Holiday Home Work)
No ratings yet
Physics - XII (Holiday Home Work)
10 pages
UK Dist II PU Physics QP Midterm-2024
No ratings yet
UK Dist II PU Physics QP Midterm-2024
2 pages
Physics MCQ
No ratings yet
Physics MCQ
11 pages
Ginn Reading 360 Little Books. Level 3
No ratings yet
Ginn Reading 360 Little Books. Level 3
12 pages
Electrostatics
No ratings yet
Electrostatics
20 pages
SGK Physics and Chemistry Material 2011
0% (1)
SGK Physics and Chemistry Material 2011
118 pages
12 Physics Work Sheet 1 B CH 2
No ratings yet
12 Physics Work Sheet 1 B CH 2
4 pages
PHYS120-Midterm-Exam
No ratings yet
PHYS120-Midterm-Exam
4 pages
Physics For All (Panda Sir)
No ratings yet
Physics For All (Panda Sir)
11 pages
II Puc Physics Qb 24-25-1
No ratings yet
II Puc Physics Qb 24-25-1
53 pages
F.SC - II Physics Q-Bank CH # 12
No ratings yet
F.SC - II Physics Q-Bank CH # 12
5 pages
MCQ
No ratings yet
MCQ
7 pages
Physics Minor Test 1
No ratings yet
Physics Minor Test 1
7 pages
Electrostatics: Physics Worksheet Class: 12
No ratings yet
Electrostatics: Physics Worksheet Class: 12
4 pages
12th CBSE Midterm - Physics
No ratings yet
12th CBSE Midterm - Physics
5 pages
2PUC 2014 2024 April
No ratings yet
2PUC 2014 2024 April
5 pages
MCQ2
No ratings yet
MCQ2
9 pages
Chapter 1 Mcqs
No ratings yet
Chapter 1 Mcqs
8 pages
physics guess papaer
No ratings yet
physics guess papaer
72 pages
Class 12 Physics Chapterwise MCQ's-1
No ratings yet
Class 12 Physics Chapterwise MCQ's-1
9 pages
Unit - 1 Electrostatics: One Mark Questions
No ratings yet
Unit - 1 Electrostatics: One Mark Questions
20 pages
FTS-05_B QP
No ratings yet
FTS-05_B QP
25 pages
pt1 physics
No ratings yet
pt1 physics
3 pages
O level Physics Questions And Answer Practice Papers 1
From Everand
O level Physics Questions And Answer Practice Papers 1
Esther Chen
3.5/5 (4)
O level Physics Practice Papers 6
From Everand
O level Physics Practice Papers 6
Esther Chen
5/5 (1)
O level Physics Practice Papers 4
From Everand
O level Physics Practice Papers 4
Esther Chen
No ratings yet
Reviews in Computational Chemistry
From Everand
Reviews in Computational Chemistry
Abby L. Parrill
No ratings yet
O level Physics Practice Papers 7
From Everand
O level Physics Practice Papers 7
Esther Chen
2/5 (1)
Fingertip Hall Effect Joystick - RT600
No ratings yet
Fingertip Hall Effect Joystick - RT600
5 pages
Breaker Duty User Guide PDF
No ratings yet
Breaker Duty User Guide PDF
79 pages
Voltage Sag Analysis Case Studies: Jones
No ratings yet
Voltage Sag Analysis Case Studies: Jones
7 pages
Carvin BX500
No ratings yet
Carvin BX500
1 page
Detector Ultrasonico Rps-401
No ratings yet
Detector Ultrasonico Rps-401
2 pages
Instant Access to Radiowave propagation and antennas for personal communications 3rd Edition Kazimierz Siwiak ebook Full Chapters
100% (6)
Instant Access to Radiowave propagation and antennas for personal communications 3rd Edition Kazimierz Siwiak ebook Full Chapters
51 pages
Mp-In001 - En-P Servomoteur Reférence
No ratings yet
Mp-In001 - En-P Servomoteur Reférence
26 pages
22XB
100% (1)
22XB
8 pages
Syllabus KTU CS209
No ratings yet
Syllabus KTU CS209
1 page
Lesson 1 - ELectric Charge
No ratings yet
Lesson 1 - ELectric Charge
9 pages
AC Bridges
No ratings yet
AC Bridges
12 pages
Ac Servocombi For Autolevelling Drawframes: A New Ac Servo-Motor For Perfectly Leveled Slivers
No ratings yet
Ac Servocombi For Autolevelling Drawframes: A New Ac Servo-Motor For Perfectly Leveled Slivers
2 pages
English 10 Revision Sems 1
No ratings yet
English 10 Revision Sems 1
18 pages
FusionSolar Residential Commercial Datasheet
No ratings yet
FusionSolar Residential Commercial Datasheet
41 pages
General_Chapter_06.06.2024_2.4.9_Conductivity_Ver_1
No ratings yet
General_Chapter_06.06.2024_2.4.9_Conductivity_Ver_1
8 pages
2010 VJC Physics Prelim H2 P2
No ratings yet
2010 VJC Physics Prelim H2 P2
14 pages
EFM550-Datasheet-B210372EN-J
No ratings yet
EFM550-Datasheet-B210372EN-J
2 pages
Zener Diode
No ratings yet
Zener Diode
4 pages
Lecture 3 VLSI Technology
No ratings yet
Lecture 3 VLSI Technology
27 pages
ABB Drives: Installation and Start-Up Guide
No ratings yet
ABB Drives: Installation and Start-Up Guide
54 pages
DVGW 40 Angle Current Output SUV21.2 Y2 C
No ratings yet
DVGW 40 Angle Current Output SUV21.2 Y2 C
1 page
User's Manual
No ratings yet
User's Manual
42 pages
Auto Leveler
No ratings yet
Auto Leveler
6 pages
Diagnostic of Broken Bars by MCSA Method
No ratings yet
Diagnostic of Broken Bars by MCSA Method
3 pages
PS3 Serie
No ratings yet
PS3 Serie
10 pages
11.3 Three-Phase CTPT Operated Keypad Energy Meter
No ratings yet
11.3 Three-Phase CTPT Operated Keypad Energy Meter
195 pages
Ha Report
No ratings yet
Ha Report
6 pages
Dragger User Manual
No ratings yet
Dragger User Manual
4 pages